Você está na página 1de 620

A Publication of

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.


HILVERSUM, THE NETHERLANDS
Order No :

3522 009 11298

Date

September 2007

Great care has been taken to ensure that the information


contained in this handbook is accurate and complete.
Should any errors or omissions be discovered or should any users
wish to make suggestions for improving this handbook, they are
invited to send the relevant details to:
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.
P.O. BOX 32
1200 JD HILVERSUM
THE NETHERLANDS

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V. 2007.


All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is
prohibited without the written consent of the copyright owner. All
brand names and product names in this document are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

PREFACE
This manual is valid for the SOPHO 2000 IPS telephone system.
In this manual the term NEAX 2000 IPS or NEAX PBX telephone system represents the
SOPHO 2000 IPS system.
This book might refer to products not included in the SOPHO portfolio.
Certain items in this manual do not apply to the European market.
CE Notice (European Union)
This equipment is intended to be used for connection to the telephone network according
to the following standards :
ISDN interfaces :
- ETS 300 011 (PRI)
- ETS 300 012 (BRI)
- ETS 300 402 (PRI & BRI)
- ETS 300 403 (PRI & BRI)
- TBR3 (BRI)
- TBR4 (PRI)

Analogue interfaces :
- ANSI/TIA/EIA-464-C (all interfaces)
- TBR15 (2-wire E&M)
- TBR17 (4-wire E&M)
- TBR21 (extension interface)

To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country
or network provider specific features should match the supported features of the IPS
system. For an overview of the supported features, refer to your local NEC Philips
representative or the support desk of NEC Philips Unified Solutions.

Hereby NEC Philips Unified Solutions declares that this product is in conformity with the
essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.
A copy of the related Declaration of Conformity can be obtained via the address mentioned
on the inside cover.
Warning : This is a class A product.
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION


For countries in the European Union
The symbol depicted here has been affixed to your product in order to
inform you that electrical and electronic products should not be disposed
of as municipal waste.
Electrical and electronic products including the cables, plugs and accessories should be
disposed of separately in order to allow proper treatment, recovery and recycling. These
products should be taken to a designated facility where the best available treatment,
recovery and recycling techniques are available. Separate disposal has significant
advantages: valuable materials can be re-used and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted
substances into the municipal waste stream. This contributes to the protection of human
health and the environment.
Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical and
electronic products via the general municipal waste stream.
In order to facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements
have been made for local collection and recycling. In case your electrical and electronic
products need to be disposed of please refer to your supplier or the contractual
agreements that your company has made upon acquisition of these products.
At www.nec-philips.com/weee you can find information about separate disposal and
environmentally sound recycling.

For countries outside the European Union


Disposal of electrical and electronic products in countries outside the European Union
should be done in line with the local regulations. If no arrangement has been made with
your supplier, please contact the local authorities for further information.

ii

LIST OF TERMS
Abbr. NEC Description
NEC
(Trunk) Route Restriction Class
AIMWorX
Authorization Code
Background music (feature)

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks


PBC
TRFC

Boss/Secretary dialing
Broker's call
Busy in/busy out - ACD
Class of Service
Coin lines
Consecutive Speed Dialing
Consultation hold
Development table
Dial conversion
Dynamic Dial Pad
Executive calling
Ground Start
Hearing Aid Compatibility
Home side trunk

User side
trunk

Legacy
Location number
Loop Start
Mate side trunk

Network
side trunk

MATWorX
Multi line terminal
Multiple Call Forwarding
My Line
Nailed down connection (data)
Night Connection - fixed
Night connection - fixed
Night Connection - flexible
Office Code

PLE

CLID

One touch key


OpenWorX
Operator
Party lines
Peer to peer
Pilot number
Preset dialing
Prime Line
Restriction Class
Route Advance
Route Pattern
Save and Repeat
Secondary appearance

TRFC

LNR

Traffic Class
SMDR & CTI based management platform
PID code
When phone is idle, user can have
background music on speaker
Executive/Secretary
Shuttle : alternate between 2 parties
occupying one line
Group - Absent/Present switching
Facility Class Mark (sometimes traffic class)
Common number can be speed dial,
individual choice dialed manually
Enquiry
Analysis tree : table within numbering plan
Conversion from pulse to DTMF
Pressing numeric keys grabs a line as well.
VIP status assigned to a station.
Earth calling : analog trunk protocol
Voice volume control on terminals
For ISDN trunks
TDM based equipment (non IP)
Division based on capabilities or priorities in
the IP system
Subscriber signalling e.g. an ATU-SS
For ISDN trunks
Operational Maintenance interface tool
SOPHO Set / ErgoLine : digital terminal with
soft key assignment possible
Multi hop (maximum 5 hops allowed)
Users own station number.
Fixed connection between two data
adapters.
Permanent Line Extension
Permanent Line Extension
CF on night extension
Cluster Identity used for Open Numbering
Plans
Dterm keys, work (and programmed) like
speed dial function
CTI Application platform
PSTN operator / provider
Peer to peer : one to one relation on
functional level
Group number
En-block dialing : prepare number and send
it in one go (versus overlap dialing)
Seized line (trunk line or extension) when
going off-hook (or speaker)
Traffic Class
Alternative routing when trunk(s) busy
Tree : part of the number analysis table
Last Number Redial
park position / sub line

iii

Abbr. NEC Description


NEC
Single line terminal
Software Line Appearance
Split Call Forwarding
Stack Dial
Stack Dial
Station
Station Class
Sub Line
Tenant
Trunk Route
Voice Call
Whisper page
Account Code (Client Billing Code)
Authorization Code Facility

AC
ACF
ADF
ALM DSPP (External) Alarm Display Panel
ANI
Automatic Number Identification
ANS
AOC
AP
AP
ATND
AttCon
BATTM
BGM
BHCA
BK
BSY
BT
CAMA
CAS
CAT
CCIS

CCT
CF-D

Answer
Advice of charge
Application Card
Analog Port
Attendant
Attendant console
Battery Module
Back Ground Music service
Busy Hour Call Attempts
Black
Busy
Busy Tone
Centralized Message Accounting
Centralized Attendant Service
Customer Administration terminal
Common Channel Interoffice
Signalling
Common Control Switching
arrangement
CCIS Trunk
Call Forwarding - Destination

CFT
CIC

Conference trunk
Circuit Identification Code

CID
CIR
CIS
CM
CNP
CO
COT
CPN
CPN
CPU
CRD
CS
CSU
DAT

Call ID Display
Caller ID Receiver
Call Information System
Command
Closed Numbering Plan
Central Office
Central Office Trunk
Calling Party Number
Calling Party Number
Central Processing Unit
Call Redirect
Cell Station

CCSA

iv

Digital Announcement Trunk

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks


PBC

LNNR

Analog Phone
Virtual Extension
Separate CF for internal and external calls.
Last Number/Number Repetition
Outgoing calling list (5 entries)
Redial List : maximum 5 numbers

Extension /
DNR
FCM
Facility Class Mark
Lines on the stations, other then the prime
line
Analysis group : multi company on one PBX
Route

PID

Announcement without 3rd party hearing it.


Password integrated dialing
OAI related.
OAI related.
Caller subscriber number coming in with MF
signaling on T1 trunks

Operator console

A standard related to 911 service


Dterm used as programming device for PBX
Comparable to IMP
Customer specific leased lines/network, US
only
Call Forwarding Destination : no
preparation on originator necessary.
Trunk channel ID for virtual IP trunk
channels (Line number)

See Commands Manual

ISDN calling party number

Abbr. NEC Description


NEC

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks


PBC

DBM
DCH
DD key
DDD
DDI
DDOVR
DeskCon
DID calls

D-Channel Handler
Do not Disturb Key
Direct Distance Dialing
Direct Digital interface
Do not Disturb Override
Desk Console
Direct Inward Dialing calls

DISA
DIT

Direct Inward System Access


DID trunk / Direct Inward Termination PLE

DLC
DM
DMS
DNIS
DOD

Digital Line Circuit


Distributed Module
Distributed Module Small
Dialed number Identification Service
Direct Outward Dialing
DDO

DP
DPC
DPC
DRS

(Rotary) Dial Pulse


Data Port Controller
Destination Point Code
Device Registration Server

DS
DSS/BLF

Differential Services (DiffServ)


Direct Station Select / Busy Lamp
Field
Device Server WorX
Dial Tone
Data Terminal Equipment
Digital (or IP) terminal
Digital Tone Generator
Digital Trunk Interface
Forced Account Code
Federal Communications
Commission
Floppy Disk
Forwarded - All calls
Forwarded - Busy
Forwarded - No answer
Frame Ground
Feature Group D format
Free Location Facility

DSW
DT
DTE
Dterm
DTG
DTI
FAC
FCC
FD
FDA
FDB
FDN
FG
FGD
FLF
FP
FX
HDT
HWT
ICH
ICI
ICM
IEC
ILC
IP
IPM
IPS
IPT
IPX
IVS

Commands Manual - AP00 card

Firmware Processor
Foreign Exchange
Hold Tone
howler tone
ISDN channel handler
Incoming Call Identification
Intercom
International Electro-technical
Commission
ISDN line card
Internet Protocol
Indications per minute
Internet Protocol Server
IP trunk
Internet Protocol eXchange
Integrated Voice Server

T1/E1 interface to public network


SV
DDI

SuperVisor / Operator Console


Direct dialing in : not for FX and WATS
trunk (USA only)
Remote access to system
Permanent Line Extension(s) : for limited
direct inward dialing: 1/more trunk(s) related
to 1 station
For Dterm, Attendant and Desk Console.

Direct Dialing Out : setting up external calls


without attendant assistance
Pulse dialing
Kind of Cluster ID; for terminating office
Compare with Gatekeeper function:
registering endpoints

For Dterm assistant software

Dterm

Desktop Telephone (analog or digital)

American regulation office

Signalling format for ANI.


OIA related, Desksharing look-a-like.
NOT available for IPS 2000
Compare with PMC
Specific part of PSTN; US only
Alarm tone

IP

Internet Protocol
For flashing lamps / LEDs

Abbr. NEC Description


NEC

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks


PBC

KF

Key Feauture (registration)

KTF
LAN
LCR

Key Transfer Facility


Local Area Network
Least Cost Routing

LAN
LCCR

LDN
LDT
LEN

Listed Directory Number


Loop Dial trunk
Line Equipment Number

EHWA

LT
MAT

Line/Trunk
Maintenance Administration Terminal OMM

MB

Make Busy

MCI
MEM
MFG
MFR
MIB
MIC
MIS
MJ
MLDT
MN
MOC
MP
MRF
MSF
MSG
NEAX
NS
NTF
NTS
OAI
ODT
ODT
ONP
OPC
OPR
PAD

Message Center Interface


Main Memory
MF receiver / MFC receiver/sender
management Information Base
Microphone
management Information System
Major (alarm)
Melody Trunk
Minor (alarm)

PBR
PBSND
PC
PCK
PFT
PIM

Main Processor
Mode Reset Facility
Mode Set Feature
Message
NEC PBX
Network Station
Number Transfer Facility
Night Transfer Station
Open Application Interface
OD Trunk
Outband Dialing Trunk
Open Numbering Plan
Origional Point Code
Operator
(IP) Packet Assembler /
Disassembler
Push Button Receiver
Push Button Sender
Point Code
Pickup
Power Failure Transfer
Port Interface Module

PLO
PMS

Phase Locked Oscillator


Property Management System

PN
PNA
PPS
PROTIMS
PRT
PS
PS
QoS

Part Number
Phone line Network Alliance
Pulses per second

vi

SETOUT

ISDN primary rate interface trunk


Personal Station
Portable Station
Quality of Service

Key systems are operating directly on


outside lines.
OAI related.
Local Area Network
Least cost call routing : number analysis
development manner

Equipment hardware Address : PIM nbr (0 ~


7)+ Port nbr (00 ~ 63) LEN = (000 ~ 763)
Operation Maintenance module : PC
needed in terminals mode
Set to Out Of Service : Out of Service / Not
installed situation for reset or maintenance
Interface for Voice Mail system

Microphone or its key

OM terminal window, part of MATWorX


Compare with CPU
OAI related.
OAI related.
SOPHO
OAI related.
Night Extension
CTI interface
2/4 wire E&M

Kind of Cluster ID; for originating office


Attendant
Used for TDM / IP translation
DTMF receiver
DTMF sender

Shelf : comparable with CSM and PM


shelves
PMS

Property Management System (in hotel


environments)
For example PN-8DLCC board
Used in pulse dialing
Proprietary protocol, used for building CCIS

NEC wireless system

Abbr. NEC Description


NEC
RAS
RBT
RC
REN
RLS
ROT
RPIM
RSC
RST
RTP
SCF
SDT
SLT
SMDR
SMFN
SMFR
SOC
SP
SPID
SPN
SSFM
SSFR
SST
STA
STN
TAH
TAS
TCF
TCM
TDM
TDS
TDSW
TIC
TMF
TMSF
TNT
TRF
TSW
UAP
UCD
UNP
USOC
VC
VCT
VDSL
VM
VOIP
WAN
WATS
WCS
WH
WU
ZT

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks


PBC

Registration Admission Status


Ringback Tone
Room Cutoff
Ring Equivalence Number
Release
Reorder Tone
Remote PIM
Route restriction Class
Restricted
Real Time Protocol
Switch Control Facility
Special Dial Tone
Single Line Telephone
Station Message Detail Recording
FDCR
Status Monitor Facility (Notification)
Status Monitor Facility (Request)
System on chip
Soft Phone
Service Profile ID (ISDN)
BSP-ID
Special Part Number
Service Set facility Monitor
Service Set Facility Request
Service Set Tone
Station
Station
Trunk Appearance Hold
Trunk Answer Any Station
Terminal Control Facility
(Deluxe) Travelling Class Mark
Time division multiplexing
Time division switching
Time Division Switch
(Individual) Trunk identification Code
Terminal Multi-information transfer
Facility
(Terminal) Mode Set Facility
Tone/Music source interface
Transfer
Time Switched
User Application Processor
Uniform Call Distribution
Uniform Numbering Plan
User Service Order Code
Voice Compression
Voice CODEC circuit card
Very high data rate Digital Subscriber
Line
Voice Mail
Voice over IP
VOIP
Wide Area Network
WAN
Wide Area Telephone Service
Wireless Communication System
White
Wake up
Zone Transceiver

Registration Admission Status

OAI related.
Analog telephone
Full Detailed Call Recording
OAI related.

Basic Service Profile ID (ISDN)


OAI related.
OAI related.

Pickup incoming calls in night mode


OAI related.

Line numbers of trunk lines


OAI related.
OAI related.

Basic ACD. Distribution of calls based on


longest idle.
(Network) numbering plan
Other word for REN

Voice over IP
Wide Area Network
Specific part of PSTN, US only
"Analog DECT"

For Wireless system

vii

Dterm icon

Meaning
Hold
Transfer
Speaker
Answer
Redial
Conf(erence)
Recall
Feature
MIC
Message
Directory
-/+
Help
Exit

viii

ix

NEAX 2000 IPS


Installation Procedure Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................................................

INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................
PURPOSE ....................................................................................................................
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL ......................................................................................
REFERENCE MANUAL ...............................................................................................
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ...........................................................................................

6
6
6
7
7

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION .........................................................................


TRUNKING DIAGRAM ................................................................................................
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS .....................................................................................

9
10
12

Floor Standing Installation ................................................................................................


Wall Mounting Installation .................................................................................................
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation ..................................................................................

12
15
16

EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ........................................................................

17

Module/Installation Hardware ............................................................................................


Control Card ........................................................................................................................
Application Processor Card ..............................................................................................
Line/Trunk Card ..................................................................................................................

17
20
23
30

LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL .................................................................


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS .......................................................

42
45

Circuit Card Mounting Slots ..............................................................................................


Mountable Slots According to Number of Ports ..............................................................
Control Card Mounting Conditions ...................................................................................
Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions .........................................................
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions .............................................................................

45
47
48
50
53

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................


PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................................................................

61
62

Grounding Requirements ..................................................................................................


Static Electricity Guard ......................................................................................................
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards .........................................................
Turning Power ON ..............................................................................................................
Turning Power OFF ............................................................................................................
System Data Backup ..........................................................................................................

62
63
65
69
71
71

PROCEDURE ...............................................................................................................

72

Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia) ..........................

74

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia) ................................
Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East) ...........................................

74
74

UNPACKING ................................................................................................................
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS ................................................................

75
76

AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System ..............................................................................


48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................

76
80

INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT .....................................................................

82

Floor Standing Installation ................................................................................................ 82


Wall Mounting Installation ................................................................................................. 100
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation .................................................................................. 103
BUS Cable Connection ....................................................................................................... 110

POWER CABLE CONNECTION ................................................................................. 111


AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System .............................................................................. 111
48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................ 118

SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST ................................................. 121


AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System .............................................................................. 121
48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................ 125

BATTERY CONNECTION ........................................................................................... 129


Internal Battery Connection ............................................................................................... 131
External / BATTM Battery Connection .............................................................................. 134

CABLE RUNNING TO MDF ......................................................................................... 137


Installation of External MDF .............................................................................................. 137
MDF Cable ........................................................................................................................... 138
Cable Running to External MDF ........................................................................................ 141

TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF ........................................................................ 144


Cable Connection to MDF ..................................................................................................
Location of Each LEN .........................................................................................................
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement ......................................................................................
MDF Cross Connections ....................................................................................................

144
145
150
167

INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 173


Peripheral Equipment and Card List .................................................................................
Analog C.O. Trunk (COT) ...................................................................................................
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT) ..................................................................................................
DID Trunk (DIT) ...................................................................................................................
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) ...............................................................................................
Optical Fiber Interface (M10) .............................................................................................
POTS Splitter (M13) ............................................................................................................
In-Skin HUB .........................................................................................................................
Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC) .......................................................................................

173
175
176
185
186
193
197
201
203

Dterm/DSS Console (DLC) ................................................................................................... 205


SN716 DESKCON (DLC) ..................................................................................................... 207

ii

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC) ...................................................................................
Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP) .........................................................
External TAS Indicator (DK) ...............................................................................................
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP) ...............................................................................
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP) .......................................
External BGM Source (COT/TNT) ......................................................................................
Power Failure Transfer (PFT) .............................................................................................
Alarm Display Panel (MP) ..................................................................................................
Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP) ................................................................................
Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP) ..........................................................................................
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00) ............................................................

237
245
246
249
252
257
259
264
265
268
269

MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS ..................................................................................... 275


SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ........................................................................................... 277
All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT ........................................................................................... 277
Resident System Program ................................................................................................. 277

SYSTEM DATA ENTRY ............................................................................................... 278


CAT ...................................................................................................................................... 278
MAT ...................................................................................................................................... 279
Confirming Lamp Indication .............................................................................................. 279

OPERATION TEST ...................................................................................................... 280


SYSTEM DATA SAVE ................................................................................................. 281
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK .............................................................................. 281
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................... 281
Visual Check ....................................................................................................................... 281

MOUNTING FRONT COVER ....................................................................................... 282


BACKUP CPU SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 283
Required Equipment ...........................................................................................................
Service Conditions .............................................................................................................
Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................
Mounting Locations of MP Cards ......................................................................................
MP System Changeover .....................................................................................................
Office Data Copy .................................................................................................................

283
284
285
286
287
288

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS ....................................... 289


HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................ 290
CONTROL CARD ........................................................................................................ 291
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP) ......................................................
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) ..............................................................................................
PN-CP15 (FP) .......................................................................................................................
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR) ...........................................................................................................
PZ-M606-A (ETHER) ............................................................................................................

iii

292
298
303
305
307

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
JULY/15/2007

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR) ....................................................................................................
PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR) ....................................................................................................
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) ....................................................................................................
PZ-PW135 (PWR) ................................................................................................................

309
312
315
317

APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD .......................................................................... 319


PN-AP00-B (AP00) ..............................................................................................................
PN-AP00-D (AP00) ..............................................................................................................
PN-AP00-B (DBM) ...............................................................................................................
PN-BRTA (BRT) ...................................................................................................................
PN-2BRTC (BRT) .................................................................................................................
PN-2BRTK (BRT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT) .............................................................................................................
PN-24CCTA (CCT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-30CCTA (CCT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-CFTC (CFT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-CFTC-A (CFT) ................................................................................................................
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA) ...............................................................................................................
PN-DAIB (DAIB) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DAIC (DAIC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DAID-A (DAID) ...............................................................................................................
PN-DAIE (DAIE) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DAIF (DAIF) ...................................................................................................................
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH) ......................................................................................................
PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT) ......................................................................................................
PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT) ......................................................................................................
PN-24DTA-C (DTI) ...............................................................................................................
PN-30DTC-C (DTI) ...............................................................................................................
PN-8ETIA (HUB) ..................................................................................................................
PN-2ILCC (ILC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-8IPTA (SIP) ....................................................................................................................
PN-IPTB (IPT) ......................................................................................................................
PN-24PRTA (PRT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-30PRTA (PRT) ...............................................................................................................
PN-4RSTB (MFR) .................................................................................................................
PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR) ...........................................................................................
PN-SC00 (CCH) ...................................................................................................................
PN-SC01 (DCH) ...................................................................................................................
PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH) ............................................................................................
PN-SC03-B (ICH) .................................................................................................................
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) ............................................................................................................

iv

321
327
333
336
341
346
351
359
365
372
374
376
381
385
388
394
398
402
407
414
421
427
433
435
440
444
448
456
463
465
467
470
473
475
477

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
JULY/15/2007

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PZ-M542 (CONN) ................................................................................................................. 480
PZ-M557 (CONN) ................................................................................................................. 482

LINE/TRUNK CARD .................................................................................................... 484


PN-2AMPA (AMP) ................................................................................................................
PN-CFTA (CFT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-CFTB (CFT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-2COTD (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-2COTE (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4COTA-A (COT) .............................................................................................................
PN-4COTB (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-4COTE (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4COTF (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4COTG (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-6COTJ (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-8COTH (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-8COTQ (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-8COTR (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-8COTS (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-8COTT (COT) .................................................................................................................
PN-8COTU (COT) ................................................................................................................
PN-2CSIA (CSI) ....................................................................................................................
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI) ................................................................................................................
PN-2CSIH (CSI) ....................................................................................................................
PN-4CSIA (CSI) ....................................................................................................................
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI) ................................................................................................................
PN-4DATC (DAT) .................................................................................................................
PN-4DIDA (DIT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-2DITA (DIT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-4DITB (DIT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-DK00 (DK) ......................................................................................................................
PN-2DLCN (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-4DLCM (DLC) ................................................................................................................
PN-4DLCT (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-4DLCQ (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-8DLCL (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-8DLCP (DLC) .................................................................................................................
PN-2ILCA (ILC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) ..............................................................................................................
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) ............................................................................................................
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) ........................................................................................................

488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
508
511
514
517
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
534
537
541

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PN-4LCC (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCD-A (LC) ..................................................................................................................
PN-4LCE (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCF (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCK (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCL (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCV (LC) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4LCW (LC) .....................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAA (LC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAB (LC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAD (LC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAE (LC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAF (LC) ....................................................................................................................
PN-8LCAK (LC) ...................................................................................................................
PN-2LDTA (LDT) ..................................................................................................................
PN-4LDTA (LDT) ..................................................................................................................
PN-4LLCB (LLC) ..................................................................................................................
PN-M10 (M10) ......................................................................................................................
PN-M13 (M13) ......................................................................................................................
PN-2ODTA (ODT) ................................................................................................................
PN-2ODTB (ODT) ................................................................................................................
PN-4ODTA (ODT) ................................................................................................................
PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT) ...........................................................................................
PN-4RSTH (SDT) .................................................................................................................
PN-8RSTG (PBR) .................................................................................................................
PN-RTA (RTA) .....................................................................................................................
PN-TNTA (TNT) ....................................................................................................................
PN-4VCTI (4VCT) .................................................................................................................
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) ..................................................................................
PZ-8PFTB (PFT) ..................................................................................................................
PZ-M623 (ETHER) ...............................................................................................................
PZ-M649 (DTI) ......................................................................................................................
PZ-M650 (DTI) ......................................................................................................................
PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10) ............................................................
PZ-VM01 (VM01) ..................................................................................................................
PZ-VM02 (VM02) ..................................................................................................................
PZ-VM03-M (VM03) ..............................................................................................................
PZ-VM04 (VM04) ..................................................................................................................
PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06) .....................................................................................

vi

545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
563
565
566
567
568
570
571
572
573
576
578
580
582
583
584
587
590
593
594
597
602
603

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(1)

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

(2)

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.

(3)

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.

(4)

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

(5)

Read and understand all instructions.

(6)

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

(7)

Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol
cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

(8)

Do not use this product near water; for example, under water pipes near a bath tub, sink, or laundry
tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

(9)

Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious
damage to the product.

(10) Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be
blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never
be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in
installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
(11) This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label.
If you are not sure of the type of power source available, consult with your local power company.
(12) This product is normally connected with a three wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature.
If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(13) Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be
abused by persons walking on it.
(14) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
(15) Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous
voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid
of any kind on the product.
(16) To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified
serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose
you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the
appliance is subsequently used.
(17) Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.


If liquid has been spilled into the product.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls, that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of
other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified
technician to restore the product to normal operation.
(e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
(f) If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

(18) Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
(19) Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(20) For Digital interfaces, a CSU/DSU may be required for proper operation. When choosing a CSU/
DSU, make sure that it is provided with suitable lightning protection. If this is not the case, gas tube
arresters as specified elsewhere in this manual (b) must be connected to the involved interface wiring.
NOTE:

The Ethernet ports are not intended to be connected directly to outdoor cables.
PBX

MDF
OFF-PREMISE

PRT/BRT/DTI/CCT

CSU/DSU

RECEIVE

RA

RB
TRANSMIT

To Digital
Network

TA

TB

CSU : Customer Service Unit


DSU : Digital Service Unit
MDF : Main Distribution Frame

(21) When installing the LC card for providing the analog telephone interface that is connected to offpremise site, use PN-4LLCB card.
(22) Do not install the PN-2ODTB/PN-4ODTA card for providing the analog trunk interface that is
connected to off-premise site.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(23) When installing the BRI/PRI/E1/CCIS/Q-SIG/Dterm interface designated by SELV that has the
possibility of being connected to off-premise site, gas tube arrester is required for proper operation.
(a) Installation
When installing the DLC card for providing the Dterm interface that is connected to off-premise
site, use PN-2DLCN/PN-4DLCT card and connect gas tube arrester across the line as shown in
Figure below.
PBX

MDF
GAS TUBE
ARRESTER

DLC

OFF-PREMISE

R
G

To Dterm

MDF : Main Distribution Frame


G

When installing the BRT/PRT/DTI/CCT card for providing the BRI/PRI/E1/CCIS/Q-SIG


interface that is connected to off-premise site, connect gas tube arresters across each transmit and
receive line as shown in Figure below.
MDF

PBX

GAS TUBE
ARRESTER

BRT/PRT/DTI/CCT

OFF-PREMISE
RECEIVE

RA
G
RB
TRANSMIT

To Digital
Network

TA
G
TB

GAS TUBE
ARRESTER
MDF : Main Distribution Frame
G

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(b) Specifications
Specifications of the gas tube arrester to be provided are as follows.

PARAMETER

SPECIFICATIONS

Transmission bandwidth

DC to 2MHz

Transmission loss

Less than 0.5dB

Longitudinal balance

More than 50dB

Nominal decoupling resistance

1ohm 0.5%

Operating voltage

DC 60V Max.

Nominal DC spark-over voltage

90V

Impulse spark-over voltage (at 1.2/50s 6kV)

1500V (at initial max. voltage; 0 to 10s)


20V (at more than10s)

Nominal discharge current

100 A (at 10/200s)

(24) Warning for US and Canada only

WARNING
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm

INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE/OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
This manual explains the installation procedure for the NEAX 2000 IPS system. This equipment can only
be serviced by a qualified service person. You should perform each installation step according to the procedures described in CHAPTER 2.

OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL


This manual consists of three chapters. The following paragraphs summarize Chapters 1 through 3.
CHAPTER 1

GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains the outline of system configuration, the name and functions
of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting conditions of
circuit cards used in the system.

CHAPTER 2

INSTALLATION
This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment, system
initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should follow after
completing the installation.

CHAPTER 3

LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the switch settings of
each circuit card used in the system.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm

INTRODUCTION
REFERENCE MANUAL/TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

REFERENCE MANUAL
During installation, refer also to the NEAX 2000 IPS manuals below:
System Manual:
Contains the system description, hardware installation procedure, the programming procedure for the
NEAX 2000 IPS System.
Command Manual:
Contains Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command function and data required
for programming the system, and Resident System Program.
Office Data Programming Manual:
Contains the Customer Specifications Sheets and the Office Data Programming Sheets.
Feature Programming Manual:
Contains procedure for programming each business and hotel feature.
Maintenance Manual:
Contains the maintenance service features and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.
MATWorX User Guide:
Provides information to use the MATWorX program, including highlights about features of the
program.
This guide is a supplement to the MATWorX online Help system, which provides context-sensitive
information and procedures to perform tasks using MATWorX.

TERMS IN THIS MANUAL


In this manual, PBX system is designated as PBX usually. And the following is used if the type of the
PBX system need to be identified.
NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER: NEAX 2000 IPS
NOTE:

In regard to China market, we have not released NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL
SERVER but NEAX2000 is released.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch0001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter explains the outline of system configuration, the name and functions of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting
conditions of circuit cards used in the system.

TRUNKING DIAGRAM ..............................................................


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ...................................................
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ......................................
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL ...............................
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS .....................

10
12
17
42
45

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


TRUNKING DIAGRAM

TRUNKING DIAGRAM
This figure shows a typical trunking diagram for the system.

Trunking Diagram
NOTE:

The equipment marked with (*) is provided by the customer.


PFT
COT
SINGLE LINE TEL

LC

MP

LONG LINE STATION


SINGLE LINE TEL
WITH MESSAGE
WAITING LAMP

LLC

INCLUDING

LC

TDSW
DTG
PBSND
16CFT
MLDT
PLO
MEM
MODEM
PBR
DAT
DK
TNT
SMDR
PMS
DRS
FP
OAI
IPT
CSH

ILC

ISDN TERMINAL
D

term

DLC

DSS
LONG LINE

Dterm

DLC

DSS
ATTCON/DESKCON

DLC
CSI
CS/ZT

PS
HomePNA/
VDSL
ADAPTER

LC/LLC
M13
CSI

PC

HUB
ROUTER
SMDR

DtermIP/IP-CS/
PC FOR OAI/
MAT/
SMDR/
PMS

LD

LDT

M10

TIE LINE

2W/4W E&M

ODT

OPTICAL
FIBER

M10

DTI/
REMOTE PIM

CCIS
NETWORK
DIGITAL
LINK

CCT
DTI
BRT

ISDN
NETWORK

PRT
CCH
CSH
DCH

DIGITAL
LINK
(FOR M649/M650)

RTA

ROUTER

4VCT
IPT

HomePNA/
VDSL MODEM

16VCT

IP-PAD

ROUTER

IP-PAD

ROUTER

AP00

IP
NETWORK

EXPMEM

PMS
AD-8/IM-16

CIS/HOTEL
PRINTER/
MCI(VMS)

DID LINE

DIT

PBR
DAT

INTERNET

AMP

ICH

POTS
SPLITTER

SINGLE LINE TEL

C.O. LINE

24DSP

VM

ROUTER

ROUTER/HUB

SIP

TCP/IP
ETHER
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX

CIR
MFR

RS-232C

MAT/SMDR

SIP NETWORK
24DSP

CFT
KEY(*)

DK

ALARM
DISPLAY
PANEL

DK

PoE
IP TERMINAL
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
MAT

PSTN

HUB

COT
COT

COT

ANNOUNCEMENT
MACHINE(*)
EXTERNAL HOLD
TONE(*)
AMPLIFIER

COT
(FOR REMOTE MAINTENANCE)
COT/TNT
FP
TNT

10

BGM (*)

SPEAKER(*)

EXTERNAL HOLD
TONE(*)

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


TRUNKING DIAGRAM

Description of Symbols in Trunking Diagram


SYMBOL
AMP
AP00
BGM
BRT
CCH
CCT
16CFT
CFT
CIS
CIR
COT
CSH
CSI
CS/ZT
DAT
DCH
DIT
DK
DLC
DRS
24DSP
DSS
DTI
DTG
ETHER
EXPMEM
FP
ICH
ILC
IP-CS
IP-PAD
IPT

SYMBOL

DESCRIPTION
Amplifier Trunk Card
SMDR/Hotel Application Card
External Music Source for Dterm
Back Ground Music Service
Basic Rate Interface Trunk Card
Common Channel Handler Card
CCIS Trunk Card
16 Circuit Four Party Conference
Trunk on MP
Conference Trunk Card
Call Information System
CALLER ID Receiver Trunk Card
C.O. Trunk Card
CS/ZT Handler Card/Virtual CSH for
IP-CS on MP
CS/ZT Interface Card
Cell Station (for PHS)
Zone Transceiver (for PCS)
4-line Digital Announcement Trunk
Card/2-line Built-in DAT on MP
D-channel Handler Card
DID Trunk Card
External Relay/Key Interface Card/
Built-in DK on MP
Digital Line Circuit Card (for Dterm,
ATTCON, DESKCON)
Device Registration Server on MP
24-channel DSP Card
DSS Console
Digital Trunk Interface Card
Digital Tone Generator on MP
Ethernet Control Card
Memory Expansion Card
Firmware Processor Card/Built-in FP
on MP/Virtual FP on MP
ISDN-channel Handler Card
ISDN Line Circuit Card
Cell Station on IP (for PHS)
8-channel IP-PAD Card
32-channel IP-PAD Card
IP Trunk Card/Virtual IPT on MP

KEY
LC
LDT
LLC
M10
M13
MAT
MDF
MEM
MFR
MLDT
MODEM
MP
OAI
ODT
PBR
PBSND
PFT
PLO
PMS
PRT
PS
RTA
SIP
SMDR
TDSW
TNT
4VCT
16VCT
VM

11

DESCRIPTION
External Key
Line Circuit Card
(for Single Line Telephone)
LD Trunk Card
Long Line Circuit Card
Optical Fiber Interface Card
POTS Splitter Card
Maintenance Administration Terminal
Main Distribution Frame
Main Memory on MP
MF Receiver/
MFC Receiver/Sender Card
Melody Trunk on MP
Modem on MP
Main Processor Card
Open Application Interface/Built-in
OAI on MP
OD Trunk Card (2/4 wire E&M)
8-line PB Receiver Card/4-line PB
Receiver on MP
PB Sender on MP
Power Failure Transfer
Phase Locked Oscillator on MP
Property Management System/Builtin PMS on MP
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Trunk
Card
Personal Station
In-Skin Router Card
SIP Trunk Card
SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
Station Message Detail Recording/
Built-in SMDR on MP
Time Division Switch on MP
Tone/Music Source Interface Card/
Built-in TNT on MP
4-channel CODEC Card
16-channel CODEC Card
Voice Mail Card

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The system provides three installation methods as follows:
Floor Standing Installation
Wall Mounting Installation
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
Example of system configurations for each installation method are shown below.

Floor Standing Installation


1-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation

223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)

PIM

417 (16.4)
NOTE

UNIT : mm (inch)

BASE

FRONT

NOTE:

Height (65 mm (2.6)) of the BASE is included.

12

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

2-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation


223 (8.8)

430 (16.9)

PIM

769 (30.2)
NOTE

PIM/BATTM

BASE

FRONT

UNIT : mm (inch)

NOTE:

Height (65 mm (2.6)) of the BASE is included.

13

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Maximum Configuration for Floor Standing Installation

223 (8.8)
860 (33.9)

PIM3

PIM2

PIM7

PIM1

PIM6

1473
(58.0)

1825
(71.8)
NOTE
PIM0

PIM5

PIM4

BATTM

BATTM

BASE

FRONT

NOTE:

UNIT : mm (inch)

Height (65 mm (2.6)) of the BASE is included.

14

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Wall Mounting Installation


1-PIM Configuration for Wall-Mounting Installation

PIM

BASE

15

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

19-inch Rack Mounting Installation


1-PIM Configuration for 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation

PIM
19BRACKET

BASE

19-inchRACK

16

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION


This section explains the names and functions of the equipment (modules, installation hardware, circuit
cards) used in the system.

Module/Installation Hardware
This table shows the names and functions of the modules.

Module Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

SN1617
PIMMD

PIM

Port Interface Module (PIM)


Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports 8).

SN1663
PIMMG
[For EU]

PIM

Port Interface Module (PIM)


Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports 8).

SN1658
PIMMF

PIM

Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System


Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU System.

SN1664
PIMMH
[For EU]

PIM

Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System


Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU System.
Continued on next page

17

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Module Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

COVER
PARTS
ASSEM-A

COVER PARTS
ASSEM

Cover Parts Assembly


One cover parts assembly is required for each PIM.

SN1545
BASERE

BASE/TOP
ASSEM

Base/Top Cover Assembly


One base and top cover assembly is required for each stack.

SN1685
BASEUC

BASE

Base for DC48 V Power Input System


Installation Cable to Terminal Blocks from this Base is to be local
provided.

SN1619
BATTMB

BATTM

Battery Module for housing PIM or CS (ZT) backup batteries


Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power interruption (for 3 hours).

SN1671
BATTMG
[For EU]

BATTM

Battery Module for housing PIM backup batteries


Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power interruption (for 3 hours).

TOP COVER
ASSEM

18

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

This table shows the names and functions of installation hardware.

Installation Hardware Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

HANGER ASSEM (B)

Wall Hanger Assembly


One HANGER ASSEM is required per PIM for Wall Mounting
Installation.

MOUNTING BRACKET

Safety Mounting Bracket


Used as an overhead hanger for Floor Standing Installation. Wire,
chain or eyebolts are to be locally provided, to secure the bracket.
To be installed on the top PIM in four or more modules of stack. It
provides 1.1G shockproof construction.

19 RACK BRACKET (A)

19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type A


One bracket is required for one PIM configuration.
One bracket is required for the top PIM of multiple module configuration.

19 RACK BRACKET (B)

19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type B


One bracket is required for the bottom module of multiple module
configuration.

I/F BRACKET ASSEM

Inter Frame Bracket Assembly


Used to joint the frames in two-frame configuration, for Floor
Standing Installation.

BASE TRAY ASSEM

Base Tray Assembly


One BASE TRAY is required per one frame for Floor Standing
Installation of Stationary Equipment.

19

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Control Card
This table shows the names and functions of each control card.
NOTE:

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) card is not required for the MP (PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/


PN-CP24-D/PN-CP26-A/PN-CP26-B) card.

Control Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B

MP

Main Processor Card


Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR
on RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual
IPT, Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB,
Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128 seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance
(33.6 Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface
functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay
timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
One card is required per system.
*: Series 3400 software enhancement

PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D

MP

Main Processor Card


Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR
on RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual
IPT, Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB,
Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128 seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance
(33.6 Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface
functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay
timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Supports MP Program Download (FTP)**.
Once card is required per system.
* : Series 3400 software enhancement
** : Series 3500 software enhancement
Continued on next page

20

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Control Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B

MP

Main Processor Card for Backup CPU system


Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR on RS232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual IPT,
Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB, Flash
ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128 seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance
(33.6 Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface
functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay
timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Two cards are required per Backup CPU system.
One card for active MP [MP0] and another card for stand by MP
[MP1].
*: Series 3400 software enhancement

PN-CP15

FP

Firmware Processor Card


Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and
inter-module BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/
receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable
delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS. When the system
consists of three PIMs or more, one each of this card is mounted
respectively in PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.

PZ-M606-A

ETHER

Ethernet Control Card


Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit/
receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol.
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
Always set to ON
[For Series 3300 software or before]
Set to ON/OFF by the office data setting
[For Series 3400 software or later]
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.
Continued on next page

21

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Control Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-PW00

EXTPWR

Power Supply Card for DESKCON


Provides 48 V DC power.
Maximum 4 cards per frame (4PIMs). Maximum 3 cards per PIM.
Occupies two physical slots width per card.

PZ-PW121

AC/DC PWR

Main Power Supply Card


Input: AC120 V/240 V (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Output: 27 V (4.4 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA), +90 V (80 mA)
One card is pre-installed per PIM.

PZ-PW126
[For UK/EU]

AC/DC PWR

Main Power Supply Card


Input: AC240 V (60 Hz)
Output: 27 V (4.4 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA), +90 V (80 mA)
One card is pre-installed per PIM.

PZ-PW122

DC/DC PWR

48 V DC Power Supply Card


Input: 24 V DC
Output: 48 V DC (1.7 A)
One card per PIM.
Used as main power supply from PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODAT card to terminals.

PZ-PW135

PWR

Main Power Supply Card for 48 V DC


Input: DC48 V
Output: DC27 V (4.5 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA),
+90 V (80 mA), 48 V (1.8 A)
Mounted in A361 PIM-DC (One card per 1 PIM)

22

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card


This table shows the names and functions of each application processor card.
NOTE:

PN-AP01 (AP01) card and PN-CC01 (ETHER) card cannot be mounted in NEAX 2000 IPS.

Application Processor Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-AP00-B
[For PCS]

DBM

Data Base Module Card for WCS Roaming function


One card per system.
Supports number extension of PS.
[Series 3400 software required]

PN-AP00-B

AP00

Application Processor Card


Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for SMDR, Hotel
Printer, CIS, PMS, MCI functions.
(For PMS function, PN-AP00-B with MRCA program is not
available.)
One card per system.

PN-AP00-D

AP00

Application Processor Card


Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for SMDR, Hotel
Printer, CIS, MCI functions.
One card per system.

PN-BRTA

BRT

1-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card


Accommodates one 2-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-2BRTC

BRT

2-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card


Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-2BRTK
[For UK]

BRT

2-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card


Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-4BRTA-A

BRT

4-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card


Accommodates four 2-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-24CCTA

CCT

CCIS (1.5 Mbps) Trunk Card


Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.
Continued on next page

23

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-30CCTA

CCT

CCIS (2 Mbps) Trunk Card


Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.

PN-CFTC

CFT

32 Party Conference Trunk Card


Maximum eight cards per system.

PN-CFTC-A

CFT

8/32 Party Conference Trunk Card


Maximum eight cards per system.

PN-DAIA-A

DAIA

T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM


Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor and BUS interface.
One through six cards must be provided at Main Site, which corresponds to the number of Remote Site.

PN-DAIB

DAIB

T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM


Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor.
One card is required per Remote PIM at Remote Site.

PN-DAIC

DAIC

T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Channel Expansion Card


Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
One through twelve cards can be provided at Main Site.
Two cards can be provided at Remote Site.

PN-DAID-A

DAID

E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM


Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor and BUS interface.
One through six cards must be provided at Main Site, which corresponds to the number of Remote Site.

PN-DAIE

DAIE

E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM


Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor.
One card is required per Remote PIM at Remote Site.
Continued on next page

24

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-DAIF

DAIF

E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Channel Expansion Card


Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.
One through six cards can be provided at Main Site.
One card can be provided at Remote Site.

PN-DTA

CCH

Common Channel Handler for Event Based CCIS


Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
Event Based CCIS.

PN-DTA

CCT

CCIS (1.5 Mbps/2 Mbps) Trunk Card


Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.

PN-DTA

DTI

T1 (1.5 Mbps)/E1 (2 Mbps) Digital Trunk Interface Card


Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-DTA

PRT

ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D/30B+D) Interface Card


Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).

PN-DTB

CCH

Common Channel Handler for Event Based CCIS


Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
Event Based CCIS.

PN-DTB

CCT

CCIS (1.5 Mbps/2 Mbps) Trunk Card


Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.

PN-DTB

DTI

T1 (1.5 Mbps)/E1 (2 Mbps) Digital Trunk Interface Card


Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-DTB

PRT

ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D/30B+D) Interface Card


Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).

PN-24DTA-C

DTI

T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card


Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.

PN-30DTC-C

DTI

E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card


Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.
Continued on next page

25

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-8ETIA

HUB

In-Skin HUB Card


PN-8ETIA: Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic change
MDI/MDI-X automatic change
L2 Switch function (Auto-Negotiation fixed)
PZ-M675: PZ-M675 card is mounted on PN-8ETIA card.
Power over Ethernet (PoE) : All Ethernet port
NOTE: Power over Ethernet (PoE) function is based on IEEE
802.3af and the NEC standard.

PN-2ILCC

ILC

2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card


Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
This card does not require PN-SC03-B (ICH) card.

PN-8IPTA

SIP

8 channel SIP Trunk Card


When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this card provides up
to 32-channel of SIP
By the office data setting, changes the setting of the card in 8
channel units.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
NOTE
Always set to OFF
Set to ON/OFF by the switch setting
[Series 3600 software required]

NOTE:

When using the firmware program of SC-3591 IPS IPTT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPTA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firmware program of SC-3249 IPS IPTT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPTA card, Auto Negotiation function is always set to ON.
Continued on next page

26

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-IPTB

IPT

IP Trunk Card
Provides LAN Interface, transmitting/receiving compressed voice
or signals over IP network.
Provides Auto Negotiation function (Set to ON/OFF by the switch
setting).
Used together with maximum of four 4VCT (PN-4VCTI) cards
(16-channels).
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.

PN-24PRTA

PRT

ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) Interface Card


Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).

PN-30PRTA

PRT

ISDN Primary Rate (30B+D) Interface Card


Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).

PN-4RSTB

MFR

4-line MF Receiver, MFC Receiver/Sender Card


Used for MF/MFC-R2 Signaling on DID/DOD trunks.
Maximum four cards can be provided per system, including the
PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A card.

PN-4RSTC

CIR

4-line Caller ID Receiver Trunk Card


Used for Caller ID (CLASS SM) on analog trunks.
Maximum four cards per system, including the PN-4RSTB card.

PN-4RSTC-A

CIR

4-line Caller ID Receiver Trunk Card


Used for Caller ID (CLASS SM) on analog trunks.
Maximum four cards per system, including the PN-4RSTB card.

PN-SC00

CCH

Common Channel Handler Card


Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
No. 7 CCIS.

PN-SC01

DCH

D-channel Handler Card


Transmits/receives signals on the D-channel of ISDN Primary
Rate (23B+D) interface or WCS Roaming interface.

PN-SC03-B

ICH

ISDN-channel Handler Card


Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls maximum
four ILC cards (Layer 2 and 3).
Continued on next page

27

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-SC03-B

CSH

CS (ZT) Handler Card for S-interface/U-interface


Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls maximum
four CSI cards, eight CS (ZT)s.
Supports number extension of PS.
[Series 3400 software required]

PN-SC03-C

CSH

CS (ZT) Handler Card for S-interface/U-interface


Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls maximum
four CSI cards, eight CS (ZT)s.
Supports number extension of PS.

PZ-M537

EXPMEM

Memory Expansion Card for AP00 Card


The system capacity is expanded when PZ-M537 is mounted on
PN-AP00-B (AP00) card.
This card is not required for PN-AP00-D (AP00) card.
Memory Expansion for AP00 is shown in the table below.

PZ-M542

CONN

Coaxial Cable Connection Card


Used to connect a coaxial cable for the Digital Trunk Interface.
Maximum two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each
PIM.

PZ-M557
[For
Australia]

CONN

Coaxial Cable Connection Card


Used to connect a coaxial cable for the Digital Trunk Interface.
Maximum two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each
PIM.

28

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Memory Expansion for AP00 (SMDR Call Record)


No EXPMEM
Local Office of
Type of
Centralized
PN-AP00-B
Billing-CCIS
/Stand-alone is
provided.

With EXPMEM

Center Office
of Centralized
Billing-CCIS is
provided.

PN-AP00-B
with AP00
program

1600

800

PN-AP00-B
with MRCA
program

2620

1965

PN-AP00-D
with MRCA
program

23580

22925

29

Local Office of
Centralized
Billing-CCIS
/Stand-alone is
provided.

Center Office
of Centralized
Billing-CCIS is
provided.

27000: Call Record for CIS is not provided.


26000: Call Record for CIS is provided.
23580

22925

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card
This table shows the names and functions of each line/trunk card.

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-2AMPA

AMP

2-line Amplifier Trunk Card


Provides Echo Canceller (EC), Automatic Gain Controller (AGC)
and Tone Disabler (TD) functions.

PN-CFTA

CFT

6/10 Party Conference Trunk Card


Use of one card: Can control a conference of up to six participants.
Use of two cards: Can control a conference of up to ten participants.

PN-CFTB

CFT

6/10 Party Conference Trunk Card


Use of one card: Can control a conference of up to six participants.
Use of two cards: Can control a conference of up to ten participants.

PN-2COTD

COT

2-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides metering pulse detection function.

PN-2COTE
[For
Australia/
Asia/
Middle East]

COT

2-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides metering pulse detection function.

PN-4COTA-A

COT

4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides a detector for line fault conditions.

PN-4COTB

COT

4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk)


Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/Ring
wire.

PN-4COTE
[For
Australia]

COT

4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
Continued on next page

30

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-4COTF
COT
[For
New Zealand]

4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk)


Provides loop holding, pulse sender, and a detector for groundsignals.

PN-4COTG

COT

4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start trunk)


Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID (CLASS
SM) signal.
-law/A-law.

PN-6COTJ
[For
Australia]

COT

6-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides a detector for line fault conditions.

PN-8COTH
[For
Philippine]

COT

8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
Loop resistance: Maximum 900

PN-8COTQ

COT

8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID (CLASS
SM) signal.
-law only.

PN-8COTR

COT

8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)

PN-8COTS

COT

8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk)


Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/Ring
wire.

PN-8COTT
[For
Australia]

COT

8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides a detector for line fault conditions.

PN-8COTU
[For UK/EU]

COT

8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)


Provides loop detection.

PN-2CSIA
[For PCS]

CSI

2-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card


Used to interface with the ZT, based on ISDN S-interface.
Maximum two ZTs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
Continued on next page

31

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-2CSIA-A
[For PHS]

CSI

2-line Cell Station Interface Card


Used to interface with the CS, based on ISDN S-interface.
Maximum two CSs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.

PN-2CSIH

CSI

2-line Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) Interface Card


Used to interface with the CS (ZT), based on U-interface.
Maximum two CSs (ZTs) can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.

PN-4CSIA
[For PHS]

CSI

4-line Cell Station Interface Card


Used to interface with the CS, based on U-interface.
Maximum four CSs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 16 time slots per one card.

PN-4CSIA-A
[For PCS]

CSI

4-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card


Used to interface with the ZT, based on U-interface.
Maximum four ZTs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 16 time slots per one card.

PN-4DATC

DAT

4-line Digital Announcement Trunk Card


Recording duration: Maximum 120 seconds
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.

PN-4DIDA
[For North
America/
Australia/
New Zealand/
Asia]

DIT

4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card


Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP signal conversion.
Equipped with 48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.

PN-2DITA
[For Hong
Kong]

DIT

2-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card


Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP signal conversion.
Equipped with 48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.

PN-4DITB

DIT

4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card


Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP signal conversion.
Equipped with 48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
Continued on next page

32

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-DK00

DK

8-circuit External Relay Control/External Key Scan Card


Provides the above-mentioned control functions on a per circuit
basis.

PN-2DLCN

DLC

2-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65
(Series E/III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[48 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
Equipped with 48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.

PN-4DLCM

DLC

4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console,
ATTCON, DESKCON
[27 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.

PN-4DLCT

DLC

4-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65
(Series E/III), Dterm Series i, DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
NOTE
[48 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
PZ-PW122 is required.

PN-4DLCQ

DLC

4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[27 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.

PN-8DLCL

DLC

8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console,
ATTCON, DESKCON
[27 V version, 2-wire type]

NOTE:

PN-4DLCT card is not used fot Dterm 70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro).


Continued on next page

33

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-8DLCP

DLC

8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[27 V version, 2-wire type]

PN-2ILCA

ILC

2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card


Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.

PN-8IPLA

IP-PAD

8-channel IP-PAD Card


Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk interface. And provides voice compression
DSP control functions such as voice compression control, DTMF relay
and FAX relay.
Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 Kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a
(8 Kbps)
NOTE 1
FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
NOTE 2
Always set to ON
Set to ON/OFF by the switch setting
When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this card provides up to 32channel of IP-PAD (When using G.723.1, provides up to 24-channel of
IP-PAD).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP card, maximum 8
per system.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to
this card.

NOTE 1: When using G.723.1, 5.3Kbps is available for the receiving bit rate.
NOTE 2: When using the firmware program of SC-3330 IPS IPADT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPLA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firmware program of SC-3213 IPS IPADT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPLA card, Auto Negotiation
function is always set to ON.
Continued on next page

34

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A

IP-PAD

32-channel IP-PAD Card


Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk interface.
Provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
Voice compression protocol: G.711 (64Kbps)
FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711)
NOTE
Used together with maximum two 16VCT cards.
Provides Auto Negotiation function (Set to ON/OFF by the switch
setting).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP card, maximum 8 per system.
100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.

PN-4LCC

LC

4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Line Test function.

PN-4LCD-A

LC

4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides momentary open and Message Waiting Lamp control,
Line Test functions for each circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.

PN-4LCE
[For
Australia]

LC

4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Line Test function.

PN-4LCF
[For
Australia]

LC

4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, Line Test functions for
each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.

PN-4LCK
[For China]

LC

4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Line Test function.

NOTE:

IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA) card does not support FAX relay.


Continued on next page

35

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-4LCL
[For China]

LC

4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, Line Test functions for
each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.

PN-4LCV
[For Brazil]

LC

4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Line Test function.

PN-4LCW
[For Brazil]

LC

4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, Line Test functions for
each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.

PN-8LCAA

LC

8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open, Line
Test functions for each circuit.

PN-8LCAB
[For China]

LC

8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 1200 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open, Line
Test functions for each circuit.

PN-8LCAD

LC

8-line Analog Line Circuit for Single Line Telephones Provides


Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open for
each circuit.

PN-8LCAE
[For China]

LC

8-line Analog Line Circuit for Single Line Telephones Provides


Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance : Maximum 1000 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open for
each circuit.

PN-8LCAF
[For EU]

LC

8-line Analog Line Circuit for Single Line Telephones Provides


Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open for
each circuit.
[Series 3800 software or later required]
Continued on next page
36

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JANUARY/26/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-8LCAK

LC

8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones


Loop resistance : Maximum 600 (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open, Line
Test functions for each circuit.
[Series 3800 software (ver.3.0) or later required]

PN-2LDTA

LDT

2-line Loop Dial Trunk Card


Loop resistance : Maximum 2500 (including internal resistance
of the distant office equipment)
Equipped with 48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.

PN-4LDTA

LDT

4-line Loop Dial Trunk Card


Loop resistance : Maximum 3000 (including internal resistance
of the distant office equipment)
PZ-PW122 is required.

PN-4LLCB

LLC

4-line Analog Long Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Provides Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance for PB/DP type:
PB :
Maximum 1200
DP (20 PPS) : Maximum 1700
DP (10 PPS) : Maximum 2500
Including the internal resistance of the distant office equipment
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open/
reverse functions for each circuit.
PZ-PW122 is required.

PN-M10

M10

Optical Fiber Interface Card


Provides optical fiber interface for T1/E1 Digital Trunk Interface
(1.5 M/2 Mbps) or Remote PIM.
Line length : 10 km (6.2 miles) or less
Line coding : CMI

PN-M13

M13

24-line Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) Splitter Card


Used to provide data communications for HomePNA (Phoneline Network Alliance)/VDSL (Very-high-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line).

PN-2ODTA

ODT

2-line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card


Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
Equipped with 48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose (2wire or 4-wire) in one card.
Continued on next page

37

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JANUARY/26/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PN-2ODTB
ODT
[For
New Zealand/
UK/EU]

2-line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card


Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
Equipped with 48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose
(2-wire or 4-wire) in one card.

PN-4ODTA

ODT

4-Line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card


Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
48 V DC power (PZ-PW122 card) is required when using the signaling type I.
When it accommodates in the LT08 to LT11 slots of the PIM, connect speech
line circuits 2 and 3 with the CN1 connector on the front side of the card.

PN-4RSTF
[For North
America/
Asia excluding China]

SDT

4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on analog Single Line


Telephones
PN-4LLCB is required.

PN-4RSTF-A
[For North
America/
Asia including China]

SDT

4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on analog Single Line


Telephones
PN-4LLCB is required.

PN-4RSTH
[For Europe]

SDT

4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on analog Single Line


Telephones
PN-8LCAD is required.

PN-8RSTG

PBR

8-line PB Receiver Card


Used for a PB station line, DID or tie line.

PN-RTA

RTA

In-Skin Router Card


10/100BASE-TX: 1, 10BASE-T: 1, RS-232C (D-sub 9pin)
Maximum 8 cards per PIM

PZ-M649

DTI

T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card


Mounted on PN-RTA Card
T1 Digital Trunk Interface: 1
Built-in CSU
Continued on next page

38

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PZ-M650

DTI

E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card


Mounted on PN-RTA Card.
E1 Digital Trunk Interface: 1
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.

PZ-M623

ETHER

Ether Control Card


Mounted on PN-RTA Card
10BASE-T: 1

PN-TNTA

TNT

2-line Tone/Music Source Interface Card


Used for BGM or Music on Hold.
Provides two jacks for an external tone/music source.

PN-4VCTI

4VCT

4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk Card


Provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
NOTE 1
Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 Kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a
(8 Kbps)
FAX protocol: T.30
Used together with IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card.
Four cards can be accommodated per IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card,
maximum 32 per system.

PN-16VCTA/
PN-16VCTA-A

16VCT

16-channel CODEC Card for 32-channel IP-PAD Card


Provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 Kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a
(8 Kbps)
NOTE 2
FAX protocol: T.30, Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
NOTE 3
Used together with IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) card.
Two cards can be accommodated per IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN32IPLA-A) card, maximum 16 per system.

NOTE 1: When using 4VCT card for H.323, FAX relay is not available.
NOTE 2: When using G.723.1, 5.3 Kbps is available for the receiving bit rate.
NOTE 3: 16VCT (PN-16VCTA) card does not support FAX relay.
Continued on next page

39

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PZ-24IPLA

24DSP

24-channel DSP Card for 8-channel IP-PAD Card


Provides Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy
Line/Trunk Interface. And Provides voice compression DSP control
functions such as voice compression control, DTMF relay same as
IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card.
Used to expand the IP-PAD channel up to 32-channels.

PZ-8PFTB

PFT

8-line Power Failure Transfer Card


To be mounted in PFT slot of PIM.
One card per PIM.

PZ-VM00/
PZ-VM00-M

VM00

4-port Voice Mail Card (NEAXMail AD-8)


One card per system.
Number of ports : 4 ports (Up to 8 ports when PZ-VM01 is
mounted)
Occupies three physical slots width per card.
To be mounted in LT00 slot of PIM.

PZ-VM10-M

VM10

4-port Voice Mail Card (NEAXMail AD-8)


One card per system.
Number of ports : 4 ports (Up to 8 ports when PZ-VM01 is
mounted)
Occupies three physical slots width per card.
To be mounted in LT00 slot of PIM.

PZ-VM01

VM01

4-port Voice Mail Extension Card


To be mounted on PZ-VM00/VM00-M.

PZ-VM02
VM02
[For North
America/Australia]

This card consists of a digital signal processor for port interface


(4 ports), central processor unit for controlling various data, hard
disk unit to read/write the application software, and an internal
modem (14.4 Kbps) for remote maintenance. Moreover, mounted
into the LT00 slot (for CPU card) of the PIM0. One card per PBX
is available.
Continued on next page

40

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function


EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

PZ-VM03-M
[For North
America]

VM03

This card consists of a digital signal processor for port interface


(4 ports), central processor unit for controlling various data, hard
disk unit to read/write the voice mail application program and
voice mail information, and an internal modem (14.4 Kbps) for
remote maintenance. Moreover, this card can provide 16 ports
digital line circuit interface, and is mounted into the LT00 slot
(for CPU card) and LT01 slot (for DSP card) of the PIM0. One
card per PBX is available.

PZ-VM04
[For North
America]

VM04

This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving


the voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface
up to 12 ports. It is mounted on the VM03 card.

PZ-VM05
[For North
America]

VM05

This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving


the voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface
up to 8/16 ports. Moreover, this card is used for expanding the fax
port interface up to 4 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04
card.

PZ-VM06
[For North
America]

VM06

This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving


the voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface
up to 8/16 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04 card.

41

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL


The cable length between the DLC card and terminal varies depending on the type of terminal.
This table shows the line conditions of each Dterm, DSS/BLF Console, and Attendant Console.

Line Conditions of Each Terminal


TERMINAL TYPE
Dterm Series i
(8 button)/
Dterm Series i
(16 button)/
Dterm75 (Series E)
(8 button)
Dterm Series i
(32 button)/
Dterm75 (Series E)
(16 button)/
Dterm75 (Series E)
(32 button)

CARD TYPE

CABLE LENGTH
(Cable 0.5 /24 AWG)

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)

300 m (984 ft.)

PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)

300 m (984 ft.)


[1200 m (3937 ft.)]

PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)

850 m (2788 ft.)


[1200 m (3937 ft.)]

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)

200 m (656 ft.)

PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)

200 m (656 ft.)


[1200 m (3937 ft.)]

PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)

850 m (2788 ft.)


[1200 m (3937 ft.)]

REMARKS
NOTE 2

NOTE 2

Continued on next page

42

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

Line Conditions of Each Terminal


TERMINAL TYPE
Dterm65 (Series III)
(8 button)

Dterm65 (Series III)


(24 button)

DSS/BLF Console
NOTE 3

CARD TYPE

CABLE LENGTH
(Cable 0.5 /24 AWG)

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)

300 m (984 ft.)

PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)

300 m (984 ft.)


[1200 m (3937 ft.)]

PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)

850 m (2788 ft.)


[1200 m (3937 ft.)]

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)

150 m (492 ft.)

PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)

150 m (492 ft.)


[1200 m (3937 ft.)]

PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)

850 m (2788 ft.)


[1200 m (3937 ft.)]

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)

300 m (984 ft.)

PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)

1200 m (3937 ft.)

PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)

1200 m (3937 ft.)

REMARKS
NOTE 2

NOTE 2

NOTE 2

NOTE 1: The value in the [ ] shows the cable length when local power is supplied.
NOTE 2: When using PN-8DLCL or PN-8DLCP card, it is not available for long line function, even if it
is equipped with Long Line Adapter.
NOTE 3: The DSS/BLF Console requires local AC/DC power supply.
Continued on next page

43

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

Line Conditions of Each Terminal


CABLE LENGTH
(Cable 0.5 /24 AWG)

TERMINAL TYPE

CARD TYPE

SN708/709/712/741
ATTCON
(2-wire type ATTCON)

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)

150 m (492 ft.)

PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)

150 m (492 ft.)

PN-2DLCN/4DLCT
(LONG)

600 m (1968 ft.)

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP and
PN-PW00 or
AC Adapter

300 m (984 ft.)

PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
and
PN-PW00

350 m (1148 ft.)

PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
and
AC Adapter

1200 m (3937 ft.)

SN716 DESKCON

44

REMARKS

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS


This section explains the conditions for mounting circuit cards used in the system.

Circuit Card Mounting Slots


(1)

Regular PIM

Circuit Card Mounting Slots


PFT

MP12/FP12

LT11/AP11

LT10/AP10

LT09/AP09

LT08/AP08

LT07/AP07

LT06/AP06

LT05/AP05

LT04/AP04

LT03/AP03

LT02/AP02

LT01/AP01

AC/DC
PWR

LT00/AP00

VM

PIM
0-7

*3
*1

*2
LTC0

LTC1

DC/DC
PWR

LTC2

LTC3

BWB

FRONT

LT00-LT11 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots


AP00-AP11 : Application Processor card
mounting slots
MP12
: PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D
mounting slot
FP12
: PN-CP15 mounting slot

VM
: PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM03-M/VM10-M mounting slot
PFT
: PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
AC/DC PWR : PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
When using the A361 PIM-DC (PIM for 48 V
DC power supply system), this slot is used for
DC/DC PWR (PZ-PW135 mounting slot).
DC/DC PWR : PZ-PW122 mounting slot
When using the A361 PIM-DC (PIM for 48 V
DC power supply system), this slot is not used.

*1 PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D (MP) card is to be mounted in the MP12 slot of PIM0.


PZ-M606-A (ETHER) card is to be mounted on the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D (MP)
card.
PN-CP15 (FP) card is to be mounted in the FP12 slot of PIM2, 4, 6 according to the system configuration.

45

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Continued on next page

*2 Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in the LT00/AP00-LT11/
AP11 slots of PIM0-7.
For mounting condition of PN-RTA (RTA), refer to the In-Skin Router Installation Guide.
*3 When using PIM for 48 V DC power supply system, the AC/DC PWR slot is used for the DC/DC
PWR slot. And the DC/DC PWR slot is not used. The other slots can accommodate the same cards
as a usual PIM.
(2)

PIM for Backup CPU System

Circuit Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)


PFT

MP00

MP01

LT10/AP10

LT09/AP09

LT08/AP08

LT07/AP07

LT06/AP06

LT05/AP05

LT04/AP04

LT03/AP03

LT02/AP02

LT01/AP01

LT00/AP00

VM

PIM
(For
Backup
CPU)

AC/DC
PWR

*1

*2
LTC0

DC/DC
PWR

LTC1

LTC2

LTC3

BWB

FRONT

LT00-LT10 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots


AP00-AP10 : Application Processor card
mounting slots
MP00/MP01 : PN-CP27-A /CP27-B mounting slots

VM

: PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM03-M/VM10-M
mounting slot
PFT
: PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
AC/DC PWR : PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
DC/DC PWR : PZ-PW122 mounting slot

*1 PN-CP27-A/CP27-B (MP1) card is to be mounted in the MP01 slot.


*2 PN-CP27-A/CP27-B (MP0) card is to be mounted in the MP00 slot.
*3 Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in the LT00/AP00-LT10/
AP10 slots.
For mounting condition of PN-RTA (RTA), refer to the In-Skin Router Installation Guide.

46

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Mountable Slots According to Number of Ports


The PIM can mount 8-port or 16-port circuit cards.
Available slots are defined by the number of ports of the circuit card.
00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12
P
F
T

V
M

8-port or 16-port circuit cards are mountable

See below.*

4-port circuit cards are mountable

In slot 08-11, 8-port circuit cards are not mountable. The number of physical ports which can be
provided by slot 08-11 depends on the number of ports of the circuit cards mounted in slot 04-07.

MOUNTING CIRCUIT
CARDS IN SLOT04-07
8-port circuit cards such as;
PN-8COT, PN-8DLC,
PN-8LC, PN-4DAT,
PN-CFTB, PN-2CSI
16-port circuit card;
PN-4CSI

MOUNTABLE CIRCUIT CARDS IN SLOT08-11 NOTE 1


Any application processor cards

4-port circuit cards NOTE 2 4-port line/trunk cards or any application processor cards
NOTE 1: For Backup CPU system, the circuit cards are mounted in slot 08 to 10.
NOTE 2: When PN-4LLCB (LLC) is used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card is to be mounted
in the LT00-LT07 (When PN-4LLCB is not used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card
can be mounted in the LT00-LT11.).

47

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Control Card Mounting Conditions


(1)

Single CPU System


PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)
Mount the PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D card in the MP slot (slot 12) of PIM0.
PN-CP15 (FP)
When the system is configured with three PIMs or more, mount one PN-CP15 card in the FP slot
(slot 12) of PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
When the system is configured with one or two PIMs, the PN-CP15 card needs not to be mounted.

MP/FP Card Mounting Slots

PIM3

PIM2

PIM7

F
P
12

F
P
12

PIM1

PIM0

PIM6

PIM5

M
P
12

F
P
12

48

PIM4

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(2)

Backup CPU System


PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)
Mount the PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B cards in the MP00 slot (slot 12) and MP01 slot (slot 11) of PIM0
for Backup CPU system.
PN-CP15 (FP)
When the system is configured with three PIMs or more, mount one PN-CP15 card in the FP slot
(slot 12) of PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
When the system is configured with one or two PIMs, the PN-CP15 card needs not to be mounted.

MP/FP Card Mounting Slots

PIM3

PIM2

PIM7

F
P
12

F
P
12

PIM1

PIM0
for
Backup
CPU

PIM6

PIM5

M M
P P
01 00

F
P
12

49

PIM4

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions


(1)

System Capacity for Application Processor Card


Maximum 24 cards per system
Maximum 256 ports per system

(2)

Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM0-7


Use slots AP00 to AP11 to mount application processor cards in PIM0 through 7.

Application Processor Card Mounting Slots

PFT

MP12/FP12

AP11

AP10

AP09

AP08

AP07

AP06

AP05

AP04

AP03

AP02

AP01

AP00

VM

AC/DC
PWR
PIM
0-7

*
LTC0

DC/DC
PWR

LTC1

LTC2

LTC3

BWB

FRONT

Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP11 slots.

NOTE:

Refer to the IP System Manual for the mounting condition of PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PNDTA/PN-DTB/PN-4RSTC-A card when building Remote PIM over IP.

50

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(3)

Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM0 for Backup CPU System


Use slots AP00 to AP10 to mount application processor cards in PIM0.

Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)

PFT

MP00

MP01

AP10

AP09

AP08

AP07

AP06

AP05

AP04

AP03

AP02

AP01

AP00

VM

PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)

AC/DC
PWR

*1
LTC0

DC/DC
PWR

LTC1

LTC2

LTC3

BWB

FRONT

Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP10 slots.

NOTE:

Refer to the IP System Manual for the mounting condition of PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PNDTA/PN-DTB/PN-4RSTC-A card when building Remote PIM over IP.

51

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(4)

Mounting Conditions of Each Card

CARD NAME

MOUNTING CONDITIONS

PN-PW00

No circuit card can be mounted in the adjoining left side slot because
one card occupies two physical slots width.

PN-BRTA
PN-2BRTC
PN-2BRTK
PN-4BRTA-A
PN-24CCTA
PN-30CCTA
PN-24DTA-C
PN-30DTC-C
PN-24PRTA
PN-30PRTA
PN-DTA
PN-DTB

Mount at least one card in PIM0 to receive source clock signals.

PZ-M542
PZ-M557

Mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card into any LTC connector of PIM


BWB.
Maximum of two cards can be mounted per PIM as follows:
LTC0 and LTC2
LTC0 and LTC3
LTC1 and LTC3

PN-4BRTA-A

Maximum of six cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 24 cards


per system. For the same number of slots as PN-4BRTA-A cards, only
line/trunk cards can be mounted in any slot of LT00-LT11 slots of each
PIM.

PN-8ETIA
[For North America/
Australia]

No circuit card can be mounted in the adjoining left side slot because
one card occupies two physical slots width.

52

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions


(1)

System Capacity for Line/Trunk Card


Maximum 128 ports per FP
Maximum 512 ports per system

(2)

Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM0-7


Use slots LT00 to LT11 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM0 through 7.

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots

PFT

MP12/FP12

LT11

LT10

LT09

LT08

LT07

LT06

LT05

LT04

LT03

LT02

LT01

LT00

VM

AC/DC
PWR
PIM
0-7

*1
LTC0

DC/DC
PWR

LTC1

*2
LTC2

LTC3

BWB

FRONT

*1 8-port or 16-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots.


*2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT11 slots.

53

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(3)

Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM0 for Backup CPU System


Use slots LT00 to LT10 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM0.

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)

PFT

MP00

MP01

LT10

LT09

LT08

LT07

LT06

LT05

LT04

LT03

LT02

LT01

LT00

VM

PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)

AC/DC
PWR

*1
LTC0

DC/DC
PWR

LTC1

*2
LTC2

LTC3

BWB

FRONT

*1 8-port or 16-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots.


*2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT10 slots.

54

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(4)

Mounting Conditions of Each Card

CARD NAME

MOUNTING CONDITIONS

PN-32IPLA
PN-32IPLA-A
PN-16VCTA
PN-16VCTA-A
[For Series 3200 R6.2/R7
or earlier]

PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the


LT01 and/or LT05 slots of PIM0-7.
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) card is to be mounted in the
LT02, LT03 and/or LT06, LT07 slots of PIM0-7, next to the PN32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card. However, PN-16VCTA and
PN-16VCTA-A cards cannot be used together in a system.
One IP-PAD card requires two physical slots and two vacant slots.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT01 slot, the LT00 physical slot is required.
The LT02 and LT03 slots must be vacant except the 16VCT card or
application processor cards.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT05 slot, the LT04 physical slot is required.
The LT06 and LT07 slots must be vacant except the 16VCT card or
application processor cards.
When mounting the 16VCT card, use the vacant slot for the IP-PAD
card.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT01 slot, the first 16VCT
(VCT0) card is mounted in the LT02 and the second 16VCT
(VCT1) card is mounted in the LT03.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT05 slot, the first 16VCT
(VCT0) card is mounted in the LT06 and the second 16VCT
(VCT1) card is mounted in the LT07.
Do not mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you
mount the IP-PAD and 16VCT cards in the LT05-LT07 slots.
Continued on next page

55

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

CARD NAME
PN-32IPLA
PN-32IPLA-A
PN-16VCTA
PN-16VCTA-A
[For Series 3300 or later]

MOUNTING CONDITIONS
PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the
LT01 and/or LT05 slots of PIM0-7.
In the following cases, other L/T card and/or AP card can be
mounted in the adjoining left side slot of IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD
CARD
CHANNEL SLOT
NO.
NO.
16 CH
24 CH
32 CH

LT01
LT05
LT01
LT05
LT01
LT05

: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED


OTHER LINE/TRUNK
CARDS

16VCT
CARD

LT02 LT03 LT06 LT07 LT02 LT03 LT06 LT07


NONE
NONE
NONE

24/32 LT01 TWO


CH LT05 CARDS

LT01

ONE
LT05 CARD

16 CH

APPLICATION PROCESSOR
CARDS

In the following cases, according as number of channels, do not


mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you mount
the IP-PAD card in the LT05 slot.
: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED

IP-PAD
CARD
CHANNEL SLOT
NO.
NO.

OTHER LINE/TRUNK
CARDS
LT08 LT09 LT10

APPLICATION PROCESSOR
CARDS

LT11

16 CH

24 CH LT05

NOTE

32 CH

LT08 LT09 LT10

LT11

NOTE

NOTE: For Backup CPU system, do not mount in the LT08-LT10


slots.
Continued on next page

56

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

CARD NAME
PN-8IPLA

MOUNTING CONDITIONS
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the LT00 and/or LT04
slots of PIM0-7.
In the following cases, other L/T card and/or AP card can be
mounted in the adjoining left side slot of IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD
CARD

: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED

24DSP
CARD

OTHER LINE/TRUNK
CARDS

APPLICATION PROCESSOR
CARDS

CHANNEL SLOT CHANNEL LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT


NO.
NO.
NO.
01 02 03 05 06 07 01 02 03 05 06 07
8 CH
16 CH
24 CH
32 CH

LT00
LT04
LT00
LT04
LT00
LT04
LT00
LT04

NONE
8 CH
16 CH
24 CH

In the following cases, according as number of channels, do not


mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you mount
the IP-PAD card in the LT04 slot.
IP-PAD
CARD

: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED

24DSP
CARD

OTHER LINE/TRUNK
CARDS

APPLICATION PROCESSOR
CARDS

LT11
LT11
CHANNEL SLOT CHANNEL
LT08 LT09 LT10
LT08 LT09 LT10
NO.
NO.
NO.
NOTE
NOTE
8 CH
16 CH
24 CH
32 CH

16 CH

24 CH

8 CH
LT04

NOTE: For Backup CPU system, do not mount in the LT08-LT10


slots.
Continued on next page

57

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

CARD NAME

MOUNTING CONDITIONS

PN-4CSIA
PN-4CSIA-A

Maximum of four cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 32


cards per system. PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A card is to be mounted only
in the even number slot of LT00-LT07. When PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIAA card is mounted in the LT00, LT02, LT04, LT06 slots, only application processor cards can be mounted in the LT01, LT03, LT05, LT07
slots which are the adjoining right side slots to the PN-4CSIA/PN4CSIA-A cards mounting slots.
NOTE 1

PN-4LLCB

When PN-4LLCB (LLC) is used for controlling message waiting


lamp, the card is to be mounted in the LT00-LT07 (When PN-4LLCB
is not used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card can be
mounted in the LT00-LT11.).

PN-4ODTA

When PN-4ODT card is mounted in the LT00-LT07 slots, allows all


speech lines to be accommodated from the BWB connector.
When PN-4ODTA card is mounted in the LT08-LT11 slots, since
speech lines circuit 2 and 3 cannot be accommodated from the
BWB connector, connect with the CN1 connector on the front side
of the card.

NOTE 1: When mounting the PN-4CSIA-A card to the PIM that the PN-4LDTA or PN-4LLCB card is
mounted, the mountable number of cards are limited as shown below.

Number of
PN-4CSIA-A Card

Number of PN-4LDTA/
PN-4LLCB Card

12

58

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

NOTE 2: The maximum DC power output of PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) card is 1.7 A.
When LT card (PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN-4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODTA*
card) that require the PZ-PW122 card is mounted, the sum current from each card to terminals
should be set to less than 1.7 A.
PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN-4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODTA card should be
mounted in the same PIM which accommodates PZ-PW122.

Current
(1 card)

The maximum
accommodation
number of cards
(1 PIM)

(1) PN-4CSIA/
PN-4CSIA-A

400 mA

(2) PN-4DLCT

180 mA

(3) PN-4LDTA

140 mA

12

(4) PN-4LLCB

140 mA

12

(5) PN-4ODTA*
500 mA
* When using the signaling type I.

Card

59

Accommodation
conditions
(1 PIM)

(1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)


1.7 A

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

60

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION

This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment,
system initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should
follow after completing the installation.

PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................
PROCEDURE ............................................................................
UNPACKING ..............................................................................
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS ..............................
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT ..................................
POWER CABLE CONNECTION ...............................................
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST ..............
BATTERY CONNECTION .........................................................
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF ......................................................
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF .....................................
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ....................
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS ..................................................
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION .........................................................
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY ............................................................
OPERATION TEST ....................................................................
SYSTEM DATA SAVE ...............................................................
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK ............................................
MOUNTING FRONT COVER .....................................................
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM ............................................................
61

62
72
75
76
82
111
121
129
137
144
173
275
277
278
280
281
281
282
283
NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS
Grounding Requirements
The system grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level, and is to be connected
to a predetermined terminal in the PBX. Standard grounding requirements are as shown below:
Communication grounding: Less than 10
Protective ground for PIM : Less than 10
NOTE:

The AC ripple on these various grounds should be less than 1/2 Vp-p.

CAUTION
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment.
Never operate this equipment with the grounding conductor disconnected.
The following specific requirements apply to ground wiring.
Install an equipment grounding conductor that is at least the same size as the ungrounded branchsupply conductors as part of the circuit that supplies the PBX. The main grounding conductor shall
be green with one or more yellow stripes. Or the equipment grounding conductors shall have a
continuous outer finish that is green. The equipment grounding connector is to be connected to
ground at the service equipment. For details of wiring connections, see WIRING POWER CABLE
TO TERMINALS.
Page 76
The attachment-plug receptacles near the PBX are all to be of a grounding type, and the equipment
grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service
equipment.

62

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
OCTOBER/19/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Static Electricity Guard


You must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect circuit cards from static electricity.

Static Electricity Guard


WHEN PLUGGING/UNPLUGGING A CIRCUIT CARD
PBX

FRAME GROUND SCREW


WRIST STRAP

WHEN HOLDING A CIRCUIT CARD


NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR
SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.

CARD FRONT

Continued on next page

63

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Static Electricity Guard


WHEN MAKING A SWITCH SETTING ON A CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT
CARD
WEAR A WRIST STRAP AND PERFORM
THE WORK ON A GROUNDED
CONDUCTIVE WORK SURFACE.

WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT CARD


CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE
BAG

CIRCUIT
CARD

WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT


CARD AROUND, KEEP THE
CARD IN A CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE BAG.

The mark shown below is attached to the sheet for the work in which circuit cards are handled. When
engaging in such work, the installer must be careful not to cause damage by static electricity.

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

64

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards

CAUTION
Turn ON the MB switch on the IP-PAD/IPT card before the following operations:
- Resetting the MP (MP built-in FP)/FP card controlling the IP-PAD/4VCT cards
- Inserting or extracting the 16VCT/4VCT cards during data transmission
- Plugging or unplugging the BUS cable (IPT TRK BUS CA) between the IP-PAD and 16VCT/
IPT and 4VCT cards
After the above operations, turn OFF the MB switch.
Be sure to insert all of the 16VCT/4VCT cards firmly into their slots, which are connected to
the IP-PAD/IPT card by the BUS cable. Otherwise, the IP-PAD/IPT card connected to the
16VCT/4VCT card will not operate normally.
When removing a circuit card from the PIM or when mounting a circuit card in the PIM, follow the procedure given below.

65

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards

CIRCUIT CARD

PROCEDURE
PLUG

UNPLUG

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/
(1) Power off
PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)
(2) Plug in
PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)
(3) Power on
PZ-PW135 (PWR)
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
PZ-M623 (M623)
PZ-M649 (M649)
PZ-PW650 (RTA)

(1) Power off

(1) Power off


or MB
switch on

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) (1) Power off


PN-CP15 (FP)
or MB
PN-AP00-B (AP00/DBM)
switch on
PN-AP00-D (AP00)
PN-BRTA (BRT)
(2) Plug in
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
PN-2BRTK (BRT)
(3) Power on
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
or MB
PN-24CCTA (CCT)
switch off
PN-30CCTA (CCT)
PN-CFTC/PN-CFTC-A (CFT)
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
PN-DAIB (DAIB)
PN-DAIC (DAIC)
PN-DAID-A (DAID)
PN-DAIE (DAIE)
PN-DAIF (DAIF)
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-8IPTA (SIP)
PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)
PN-IPTB (IPT)
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
PN-30PRTA (PRT)

(2) Unplug

CONDITION
These circuit cards must be
plugged in or unplugged only with
power off to prevent damage to the
card or other system circuitry.

(3) Power on

(2) Unplug

These circuit cards must be


plugged in or unplugged under
Make Busy condition or power off
to prevent damage to the card or
other system circuitry.

(3) Power on

Continued on next page


66

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards

CIRCUIT CARD
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH/
CCT/DTI/PRT)
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
PN-4RSTC/
PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)
PN-2ILCC (ILC)
PN-SC00 (CCH)
PN-SC01 (DCH)
PN-SC03-B (CSH/ICH)
PN-SC03-C (CSH)
PZ-M542 (CONN)
PZ-M557 (CONN)
PN-RTA (RTA) NOTE
PZ-VM00/
PZ-VM00-M (VM00)
PZ-VM10-M (VM10)
PZ-VM01 (VM01)
PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
NOTE:

PROCEDURE
PLUG

UNPLUG

(1) Power off


or MB
switch on

(1) Power off


or MB
switch on

(2) Plug in

(2) Unplug

(3) Power on
or MB
switch off

(3) Power on

CONDITION
These circuit cards must be
plugged in or unplugged under
Make Busy condition or power off
to prevent damage to the card or
other system circuitry.

It is allowed to plugging/unplugging PN-RTA (RTA) card, after flip the PWRSW switch to UP
position (Operating power is off).

67

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
1. You must hold the edge of a circuit card when plugging or unplugging the circuit card. If you
touch another area, you may be exposed to hazardous voltages.
PBX

NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.

CARD FRONT

2. You must wait for 30 seconds before plugging the circuit card again when unplugging the circuit card while the operating power is being supplied.

68

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Turning Power ON
<AC 120 V/240 V Power Supply System>

CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/
unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
2. When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of
PIM0 is off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other
PIMs are left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these circumstances.
3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operating.
(1)

Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on.
Make sure that the AC120 V/240 V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for each
country (AC120 V or AC240 V).

NOTE:

PZ-PW126 card does not have this switch.


SW2
100 V/120 V

240 V

Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to match the kind of
battery being used:
SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1
2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2

OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON

(2)

Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7.
Then, turn ON PIM0.

69

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

<48 V DC Power Supply System>

CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW135 card, do not plug/unplug this
circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
2. When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control for the PZ-PW135 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off,
no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other PIMs are
left on.
3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW135 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operating.
(1)

Check the switch position of each PZ-PW135 card before turning power on.

(2)

Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7. Then, turn
ON PIM0.

70

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Turning Power OFF


(1)

Before turning power off, inspect all line/trunk cards busy lamps to verify that no cards are
operating.

(2)

Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 or PZ-PW135 cards to OFF. First, turn OFF
PIM0. Then, turn OFF PIM1 to PIM7.

System Data Backup

CAUTION
If you operate the following without system data backup after system data setting or service
memory setting (registration of the features such as Call Forwarding and Speed Calling
[Speed Dialing] from a station), the data has been set is invalid.
You must execute the system data backup before the following operations.
-Turning Off the system
-System Initial (reset of MP card)
-Changing the MP card to Off-Line Mode
-Changing the MP card to On-Line Mode after system data setting under Off-Line Mode
You can execute the system data backup by the following two ways.
-Executing the system data backup once a day at the time set by CM43 Y=5>00
(If no data is set, the default setting is 3:00 a.m.)
-Executing the system data backup from MAT/CAT by CMEC Y=6>0:0
Do not reset the MP card, while SYSD lamp on the MP card is flashing.

71

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

PROCEDURE
This flowchart explains the procedures for installing the PBX system. You should follow the procedure
shown below.

Procedure Flowchart
START

UNPACKING

Page 75

WIRING AC CABLE
TO
TERMINALS

Page 76

INSTALLATION
OF
MAIN EQUIPMENT

Page 82

POWER CABLE
CONNECTION

Page 111

SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK


AND
HEAT RUN TEST

Page 121

BATTERY
CONNECTION

Page 129

CABLE RUNNING
TO MDF

Page 137

TERMINATION OF
CABLES ON MDF

Page 144

INSTALLATION
OF
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

SWITCH SETTINGS
OF
CIRCUIT CARDS

Page 173
REFER TO CHAPTER 3

Page 289

Continued on next page

72

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

Procedure Flowchart
A

MOUNTING
CIRCUIT CARDS

Page 275

SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION

Page 277

SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

Page 278

OPERATION TEST

Page 280

SYSTEM DATA SAVE

Page 281

CLEANING
AND
VISUAL CHECK

Page 281

MOUNTING FRONT COVER

Page 282

END

For Floor Standing Installation, there are three kinds of method to install the equipment. It depends on the
country according to the UL/cUL/ACA.
NOTE:

UL = Underwriters Laboratories (U.S.A.)


cUL = Canadian Underwriters Laboratories (Canada)
ACA = Australian Communication Authority (Australia)

Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia)


Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia)
Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East)
See next page.

73

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia)


The equipment is placed on the BASE TRAY which is fixed on the floor, and is connected to 120 V/240 V
AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable.
For installation of Stationary Equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D
Page 76
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE TRAY
Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Stationary
Equipment
Page 83

Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia)


The equipment is fixed on the floor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to AC Power
Distribution Board using installation cable.
For installation of this equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using Installation Cable
Page 78
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE
Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Fixed Equipment
Page 83

Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East)


The equipment is fixed on the floor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to 120 V/240 V
AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable.
For installation of this equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D
Page 76
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE
Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Fixed Equipment
Page 83

74

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
UNPACKING

UNPACKING
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

(1)

Check the received quantity of packages containing the PBX system with the description on the
shipping document.

(2)

Check the packaging for external damage done by transportation and record it as necessary.

(3)

Unpack the packaging.


For unpacking the packages containing circuit cards, a grounded wrist strap should be worn.

(4)

Check the quantity of equipment and materials unpacked with the shipping document.

(5)

Perform visual inspection, checking for the following items.


Modules

Overall distortion.
Scratches and dents on the surface.
Scratches and cracks on the PIM Backplane.
Broken or bent pins on the PIM Backplane.

Covers

Scratches and dents.

Circuit Cards

Overall distortion
Scratches and cracks
Loss, or damage of parts on the circuit cards.

Attendant Console

Scratches and cracks on the keyboard


Overall distortion
Damage to Keys and lamps.

75

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS


AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System
There are two kinds of Power cable : AC CORD-D for Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin
America, Australia)/Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe,
Middle East)
: Installation Cable for Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin
America, Australia)
Using AC CORD-D
(1) Take the AC CORD-D out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the code to the
BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: Cord bush is attached to the AC CORD-D.
(2) Wire the AC CORD-D and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.

Wiring AC CORD to Terminals when AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System


NOTE 1: For grounding requirements, refer to PRECAUTIONS.
Page 62
NOTE 2: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia and Europe.
BASE

TO CN1 on
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 in PIM
FG CABLE
AC CORD-B
(GREEN)
WHITE (BLUE)

BLACK (BROWN)

GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

FG

NEUTRAL

TO
120 V/240 V
AC POWER
SOURCE

LINE

BLACK (BROWN)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)

WHITE (BLUE)

AC CORD-D (3.5 m)
2

HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK


1

1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.

2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.
3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.

4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.

FRONT

Continued on next page


76

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

(4) When the system is two-frame configuration, the AC CORD-D of the right side frame can go
through the BASE of the left side frame.

AC CORD Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System
TO
120 V/240 V AC
POWER SOURCE

AC CORD-D

BASE

CORD BUSH

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

FG

NEUTRAL

LINE

77

FG

NEUTRAL

LINE

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

Using Installation Cable


(1) Take the Installation cable out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the cable to
the BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: The installer is to use minimum 16 AWG (1.3 ) size wire, maximum 9 mm size cable.
(2) Wire the Installation cable and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals
on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.

Wiring Installation Cable to Terminals when AC120 V/ 240 V Power Supply System
NOTE:

Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.


BASE

TO CN1 on
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 in PIM
FG CABLE
AC CORD-B
(GREEN)
WHITE (BLUE)

BLACK (BROWN)

GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

FG

NEUTRAL

TO AC
POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD

LINE

BLACK (BROWN)
WHITE (BLUE)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
INSTALLATION CABLE

HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK


1

1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.

2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.
3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.

4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.

FRONT

Continued on next page

78

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

(4) When the system is two-frame configuration, the Installation cable of the right side frame can go
through the BASE of the left side frame.

Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when AC120 V/ 240 V Power Supply System
TO
AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD

INSTALLATION CABLE

BASE

CORD BUSH

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

FG

NEUTRAL

LINE

79

FG

NEUTRAL

LINE

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

48 V DC Power Supply System


(1)

Take the Installation cable out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the cable to the
BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: The installer is to use minimum 16 AWG (1.3 ) size wire, maximum 9 mm size cable.
(2) Wire the Installation cable and the FG cable to the 48 V, G, FG and Ground terminals on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the 48 V, G and FG terminals on the BASE.

Wiring AC CORD to Terminals when 48 V DC Power Supply System


NOTE:

Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.


BASE

TO DC INPUT on
PZ-PW135 in PIM

FG CABLE
(GREEN)

AC CORD-B

BLACK (BROWN)

GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)

GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)

WHITE
(BLUE)

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

-48 V

FG

TO
48 V DC
POWER
SOURCE

INSTALLATION
CABLE NOTE
2

WHITE (BLUE)

HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK


1

1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.


2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.

BLACK
(BROWN)

OUTSIDE
HOLE

3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.


4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.

FRONT

NOTE:

The installation cable fixes to the BASE using a tie wrap so that it may not escape from outside
hole of terminal block, even if an installation cable is pulled.
Continued on next page

80

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

(4)

When the system is two-frame configuration, the Installation cable of the right side frame can go
through the BASE of the left side frame.

Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when 48 V DC Power Supply System
TO
48 V DC
POWER SOURCE

INSTALLATION CABLE

BASE

CORD BUSH

TERMINAL
BLOCKS
48 V

FG

81

48 V

FG

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT


Floor Standing Installation
Start
Checkup
before installation

Marking

Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the
required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/
extension cables, power cables and bus cables have been properly worked at
correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location.
Page 84, Page 85
Mark positions for installation of the PBX main equipment.
For Fixed Equipment, detach the BASE PLATE from the BASE. See Floor
Marking for BASE PLATE.
Page 86
For Stationary Equipment, see Floor Marking for BASE TRAY.
Page 86

Leveling

NOTE:

Drilling

First open necessary number of preliminary prepared holes using the drill bit
for small-diameter holes, then use the finishing drill bit for finishing drill holes.
See Drilling.
Page 87

Detaching Front Cover

Measure the level of the floor surface before installing the PBX main
equipment.
Check the level of the floor. If necessary, adjust the level by inserting spacers
beneath the equipment.

Detach the front cover of each Module. See Detaching FRONT COVER.
Page 88

Continued on next page

82

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Installation of Module

Installation of
Multiple-Module

Installation of
Top Cover

Installation of
Mounting Bracket

Checking

For Fixed Equipment


(1) Fix the BASE PLATE to the floor with anchor bolts.
(2) Fix the BASE to the BASE PLATE with screws. See Connection of BASE
and BASE PLATE.
Page 91
(3) Fix the Module onto the BASE with screws. See Connection of Module
and BASE.
Page 92
For Stationary Equipment
(1) Fix the BASE TRAY to the floor with anchor bolts.
(2) Fix the Module onto the BASE with screws. See Connection of Module
and BASE.
Page 92
(3) Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY. See Placing Module
on BASE TRAY.
Page 93
Connect Modules with screws. See Connection of Modules.
Page 94
Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs if the equipment is stacked with
five or more Modules. See Installation of I/F BRACKET.
Page 97
Install the TOP COVER to the top-stack PIM. See Installation of TOP COVER.
Page 98
Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is
stacked with four or more Modules. See Installation of MOUNTING
BRACKET.
Page 99
Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been
properly placed and tightened.

End

83

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Floor Space
UNIT : mm (inch)

223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)
200 (7.9)

1000 (39.4)
MAINTENANCE
AREA

200 (7.9)

PIM/BATTM

BASE

FRONT

84

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Cable Hole Location

MODULE

BASE

FRONT

: CABLE HOLE

85

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Floor Marking for BASE PLATE


(for Fixed Equipment)
Using MOUNTING BRACKET
: 10 (0.4)
Not Using MOUNTING BRACKET : 1.7 (0.1)

3.2
(0.2)

UNIT : mm (inch)
(WALL)

Outline of
Module

40.6
(1.6)

202.6
(7.9)

128
(5.6)

ANCHOR BOLT 4

34
(1.3)
20.4
(0.8)

30

30

(1.2)

(1.2)

347.2 (13.7)
407.2 (16.0)
412.4 (16.0)

8.8
(0.3)

8.8
(0.3)

Floor Marking for BASE TRAY


(for Stationary Equipment)
ANCHOR BOLT 4

45

(1.8)

128

(5.0)

UNIT : mm (inch)

43.9

347.2

(1.7)

(13.7)

86

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Drilling
(1) Make a preliminary hole in the concrete, using a drill bit for small-diameter holes.
(2) Drill a hole in the concrete with a drill suitable for a plug bolt a little deeper than the plug bolt
length.
Anchor Bolt Size :10 mm (0.39 inch) DIA for Fixed Equipment
6 mm (0.24 inch) DIA for Stationary Equipment
(3) Insert the anchor bolt into the hole.
(4) Push anchor bolt until the bolt stays permanently in place.
(5) Turn bolt counterclockwise and remove.
(6) Insert bolts correctly into the holes for equipment installation, then tighten them properly.

Drilling Instructions for Anchor Bolt


(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

87

(5)

(6)

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Detaching FRONT COVER


(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Push portion A of the COVER PARTS to release the LATCH.


Pivot the COVER PARTS on its left side to remove it.
Loosen its one screw.
Lift up the STOPPER to unlock.
Pivot the FRONT COVER on its bottom to remove it.

Detaching FRONT COVER


(1)

PUSH COVER PARTS.

COVER PARTS

PUSH

PORTION A

(2)

REMOVE COVER PARTS.

Continued on next page

88

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(3)

LOOSEN A SCREW.

(4)

LIFT UP STOPPER (UNLOCK).

Continued on next page

89

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(5)

REMOVE FRONT COVER.

90

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE for Fixed Equipment


(1) Mount the BASE on the BASE PLATE by placing it over the hooks.
(2) Slide the BASE into the inner end.
(3) Secure the BASE to the BASE PLATE with two screws.
NOTE:

Screws are attached to the BASE PLATE.

Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE

BASE

HOOKS

FRONT
BASE PLATE

BASE

SLIDE BASE INTO INNER END.

BASE PLATE

91

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of Module and BASE for Fixed/Stationary Equipment


(1) Mount the Module on the BASE by placing it over the hooks.
(2) Slide the Module into the inner end.
NOTE: Pay attention to do not put the Module on Edging of the cable hole on BASE.
(3) Secure the Module to the BASE with three screws.
NOTE:

Screws are attached to the Module.

Connection of Module and BASE

SCREWS

BASE

HOOKS
MODULE

SLIDE MODULE INTO


INNER END.
BASE

92

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Placing Module on BASE TRAY for Stationary Equipment


Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY.

Placing Module on BASE TRAY

BASE TRAY

93

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of Modules
NOTE:

The FRONT STOPPER, BUILD PLATES, and screws are attached to the Module.

(1) Insert the BUILD PLATES (R)/(L) into the slits of the SIDE FRAME, then slide them backward
and lock them.
(2) Place the FRONT STOPPER on the Module, then fix it with three screws.

Connection of BUILD PLATE


BUILD PLATE (R)

BUILD PLATE (L)

SIDE FRAME

Continued on next page

94

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of FRONT STOPPER


FRONT
STOPPER

PZ-PW121

SCREW

PIM TOP FRAME

SCREW

SCREW
PIM SIDE FRAME

FRONT STOPPER

SCREWS

Continued on next page

95

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(3) Hook the PIM onto the BUILD PLATEs hooks.


(4) Slide the PIM backward until it comes to the back end.
(5) Fix the PIM with three screws.

Connection of Modules

SCREWS

96

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Installation of I/F BRACKET


Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs when the equipment is two frame stacks.
Secure the I/F BRACKET to rear side of top-stack PIMs with two screws from inside of PIMs.
NOTE:

Screws are attached to the I/F BRACKET.

FRONT SIDE
SCREW

SCREW

I/F BRACKET

97

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Installation of TOP COVER


(1) Hang four hooks of the TOP COVER on the back board of PIM as shown below.
(2) Secure the TOP COVER to the front side of the PIM with two screws.
NOTE:

Screws are attached to BASE/TOP ASSEM.

HOOK

98

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET


Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is stacked with four or
more Modules.
(1) Remove four screws located on the rear side of the top-stack PIM.
(2) Secure the MOUNTING BRACKET to the PIM with the removed screws.
(3) Secure the PIM to the wall or ceiling by using wires, chains and eyebolts (locally provided).

Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET


FRONT

PIM

SCREWS

MOUNTING BRACKET

30

37
43

0(

11
.7)

8(

0(

14
.7)
16
.9)

47 (1.8)

UNIT : mm (inch)

99

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Wall Mounting Installation


Start
Checkup
before installation

Detaching
Front Cover

Marking

Installation of Module

Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the
required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/
extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors have been properly
worked at correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location.
Page 84, Page 85
Detach the front cover of each Module. See Detaching FRONT
COVER.
Page 88
Mark hole positions for installation of the PBX main equipment. See Wall
Marking for HANGER ASSEM.
Page 101
Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the wall.
Hang the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM. See Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM.
Page 102
NOTE: The BATTM cannot be installed on the wall.

Multiple-Module
Configuration

After hanging each PIM to the respective HANGER ASSEMs, connect PIMs
using screws. See Connection of Modules.
Page 94

Checking

Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been
properly placed and tightened.

End

100

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Wall Marking for HANGER ASSEM


(7.0)

352
352

(13.9)

352

(13.9)

352

(13.9)
(14.0)

ANCHOR/
SCREW

356.5

(8.3)
(8.3)
(8.3)

(8.3)

210.8
210.8
210.8

210.8

(13.9)

(7.0)

UNIT : mm (inch)

(8.3)

167.5

210.8

167.5

( 3/PIM)

HANGER ASSEM

BASE

101

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM


(1) Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the surface of a wall with three screws.
Select screws to match with the wall type as follows.

WALL TYPE

RECOMMENDED SCREW

CONCRETE

ANCHOR BOLT TYPE

Recommended 4 mm (0.16 inch)


by 25 mm (0.98 inch)

WOOD

WOOD TYPE SCREWS

Minimum 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) DIA


Maximum 4.5 mm (0.17 inch) DIA

PLASTER BOARD
MOLLY ANCHOR TYPE
[THICKNESS Minimum 9.6 mm (0.38 inch)]

Minimum 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) DIA


Maximum 4.5 mm (0.17 inch) DIA

A concrete wall is recommended because it is the most firm to mount the PBX of the three. The
plaster board is the most infirm wall of the three.
(2) Hang the slits of the rear of a PIM to the hooks of the HANGER ASSEM.
(3) Secure the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM with two screws.
NOTE:

Screws are attached to the HANGER ASSEM.

Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM

HANGER ASSEM
HOOK

HOOK

PIM

BASE
SCREWS

FRONT

102

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

19-inch Rack Mounting Installation


Start
Checkup
before installation

Detaching
Side Cover/Side Panel

One PIM
Configuration

Multiple-Module
Configuration

Checking

Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the
required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/
extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors have been properly
worked at correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location.
Page 84, Page 85
Detach the SIDE COVER and SIDE PANEL of the Module for 19RACK
BRACKET (A) mounting. For 19RACK BRACKET (B), this procedure is not
required. See Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL.
Page 104
Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the PIM. See Connection of
19RACK BRACKET (A).
Page 106
Mount the PIM with the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the 19-inch RACK. See
Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK.
Page 107
Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (B) to the bottom-stack Module. See Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B).
Page 108
Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the top-stack PIM. See Connection
of 19RACK BRACKET (A).
Page 106
Mount the modules with the 19 RACK BRACKET (A) and (B) to the 19-inch
RACK. See Mounting Multiple-Module to 19-inch RACK.
Page 109
NOTE: The BATTM cannot be installed in the 19-inch RACK.
Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been
properly placed and tightened.

End

103

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL


(1) Remove the two screws fixing the SIDE COVER.
(2) Pivot the SIDE COVER on its bottom to remove it.
(3) Remove the SIDE PANEL fixed by three screws, from the left side frame of the PIM.

Detaching SIDE COVER

SCREW

SIDE COVER

104

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Detaching SIDE PANEL

SCREWS

SIDE PANEL

105

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (A)


(1) Insert the nails of the 19RACK BRACKET (A) into the side frame of the Module.
(2) Secure them with four screws each.
NOTE:

Screws are attached to the 19RACK BRACKET (A).

Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (A)


19RACK BRACKET (A)

SCREWS

NAILS

106

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK


(1) Mount the PIM with 19RACK BRACKET (A) into the 19-inch RACK.
(2) Secure them with four screws (locally provided).

Mounting PIM to 19-inch Rack


SCREWS

19RACK BRACKET (A)


NOTE

NOTE:

The BATTM cannot be installed in the 19-inch RACK.

107

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B)


(1) Place the BASE PLATE on the 19RACK BRACKET (B).
(2) Secure the BASE PLATE with four washer and nuts.
(3) Mount the BASE to the BASE PLATE.
(See Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE.
Page 91)
(4) Mount the Module to the BASE.
(See Connection of Module and BASE.
Page 92)
NOTE:

Nuts and washers are attached to the 19RACK BRACKET (B).

Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B)

NUT

WASHER
19RACK BRACKET (B)

BASE PLATE

108

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Mounting Multiple-Module to 19-inch RACK

19BRACKET (A)

19BRACKET (B)

109

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

BUS Cable Connection


When the system is a multiple-PIM configuration, connect all the BUS Connector to each other using BUS
cables, as shown below.
Be sure to secure the BUS cables using tie wraps to avoid obstructing a PFT card.

BUS Cable
700 mm (27.6 inch)

48-TW-0.7 CONN CA

Connection of BUS Cables


BUS CABLE

P
W
R

P
W
R

PIM7

PIM2

P
W
R

P
W
R

PIM6

PIM1

P
W
R

P
W
R

PIM5

PIM0

P
W
R

P
W
R

PIM4

PIM3

PZ-8PFTB
CARD
TIE WRAP

FRONT

48-TW-0.7 CONN CA

110

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

POWER CABLE CONNECTION


The cable connections on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card are shown below.

AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System


Cable Connection on PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
NOTE 1: Follow the Label on Front Plate of PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126.
NOTE 2: If GND (Signal GND) has to be separated from FG (Frame GND), remove the link between
GND and FG terminals.
NOTE 3: In Australia, GND and FG are bonded elsewhere, so are not to be linked here. The TRC Earth
connects to the GND terminal on every PIM.
NOTE 4: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.
NOTE 5: PZ-PW126 card does not have SW2.
SW101
OFF

MJ

12

ON
1: OFF: NO CONNECTION
2: ON: SEAL/FLOAT2
OFF: OPEN/FLOAT1

PWR CNT CA-D (for PIM1 to PIM7)


PWR CNT CA-E (for PIM0)

MN
ON

NOTE 1

SW101

CN103
TO PWR1 CONNECTOR ON BWB
TO PWR0A CONNECTOR ON BWB

27 V
TO AUXILIARY
EQUIPMENT

FG

TO PWR0B CONNECTOR ON BWB

CN104

GND NOTE 2

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, 27 V, E)


POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)

CAUTION

PWR CA-A

Set the appropriate voltage


before turning on the SW1
switch.

TO OTHER PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
100 V /120 V

240 V
SW2
TO BATTERY OR OTHER PZ-PW121/
PZ-PW126

CN1
WHITE (BLUE)
O I

BLACK (BROWN)

SW1

PWR CA-A/BATT CA

TO
FRAME GROUND TERMINAL
IN PIM

GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)
L
N
FG

NOMINAL
AC INPUT

TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE

AC CORD-B

111

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of AC CORD-B
(1) Connect the AC CORD-B to the CN1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(2) Screw the ground cable of the AC CORD-B to the frame ground terminal on the PIM.

Connection of AC CORD-B
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

TO 120 V/240 V AC POWER SOURCE


AC CORD-D

CN1

CORD BUSH

BASE
AC CORD-B
FRONT
TERMINAL BLOCKS

112

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of DC Power Cable


(1) Confirm the connection of power output cables, as shown below (These cables are pre-installed).
(2) For PIM0, connect the PWR CNT CA-E to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.
For PIM1 to PIM7, connect the PWR CNT CA-D to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121/
PZ-PW126 card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.

PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E

250 mm (9.8 inch)

300 mm (11.8 inch)


550 mm (21.7 inch)

Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 and BWB


PIM
PZ-PW121
/PZ-PW126

BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)


PWR1

CN103

PWR0A
PWR0B
CARD SLOT AREA

PWR0C
LTC CONNECTOR AREA

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, 27 V, E)


POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)
PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)
PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)

113

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

(3) When you need a 48 V DC power supply installed for a Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) in WCS
system or when PN-4LDT, PN-4LLC card is installed, do the following procedure. If not, skip
this procedure and go to (4).
Page 116
STEP1: Attach four screws preliminary to the PZ-PW122 card.
STEP2: Mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the CSI, 4LDT, 4LLC
cards, and fasten the screws.
NOTE:

Screws are attached to the PZ-PW122 card.

Mounting PZ-PW122 into PIM

PIM
PZ-PW122

114

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

STEP3: Connect the PWR CNT CA-E or PWR CNT CA-D, and POWER OUTPUT CABLE
(48 V, E) as shown below.

Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126/PZ-PW122 and BWB


PIM
PZ-PW121
/PZ-PW126

BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)


PWR1

PWR0A

CN103

PWR0B
CARD SLOT AREA

PWR0C

LTC CONNECTOR AREA

NOTE

PZ-PW122
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, -27 V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (-48 V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)
PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)
PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)

NOTE:

When the PN-4LLC card is used for OPS in North America, Ferrite Core must be attached
to the POWER OUTPUT CABLE (48 V, E) between the PZ-PW122 card and the PWR0C
connector on BWB of the PIM, as shown below.
PZ-PW122

PWR0C

GRAY
RED
YELLOW

FERRITE CORE

115

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

(4)

When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
cards to each other using the PWR CA-A for power multi-connection.

PWR CA-A
550 mm (21.7 inch)

PWR CA-A

Connection of PWR CA-A Cables


(a) When using an Internal Battery

PWR

PWR

PWR
CA-A

PWR
CA-A

PIM3

PIM7

TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR

TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR

PIM2

PIM6
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY

TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR

PWR

PWR
CA-A

PWR
CA-A

PIM1

PIM5

TO INTERNAL
BATTERY

PWR

TO INTERNAL
BATTERY

PWR

PIM4

PIM0
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY

116

TO INTERNAL
BATTERY

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of PWR CA-A Cables


(b) When using an External Battery

PWR

PWR

PIM3

PIM7

PWR

PWR
CA-A

PWR

PIM2

PWR
CA-A

PIM6

PWR

PWR

PIM1

PIM5

PWR

PWR

PIM4

PIM0

TO EXTERNAL BATTERY

117

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

48 V DC Power Supply System


Cable Connection on PZ-PW135
NOTE 1: Follow the Label on Front Plate of PZ-PW135.
NOTE 2: If GND (Signal GND) has to be separated from FG (Frame GND), remove the link between
GND and FG terminals.
NOTE 3: In Australia, GND and FG are bonded elsewhere, so are not to be linked here. The TRC Earth
connects to the GND terminal on every PIM.
NOTE 4: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.

MJ
MN
ON

PWR CNT CA-D (for PIM1 to PIM7)


PWR CNT CA-E (for PIM0)

TO PWR1 CONNECTOR ON BWB

SIG

TO AUXILIARY
EQUIPMENT

27 V

TO PWR0A CONNECTOR ON BWB

FG

TO PWR0B CONNECTOR ON BWB

GND

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, 27 V, E)


POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)

PWR CA-A
TO PWR0C CONNECTOR (48 V, E) ON BWB

BLACK (BROWN)

O I

48 V
DC INPUT
G

WHITE (BLUE)

SW

GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)

TO
FRAME GROUND TERMINAL
IN PIM
48 V
G
FG

TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE

AC CORD-B

118

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of AC CORD-B
(1)
(2)

Connect the AC CORD-B to the DC INPUT connector on the PZ-PW135 card.


Screw the ground cable of the AC CORD-B to the frame ground terminal on the PIM.

Connection of AC CORD-B
PZ-PW135

TO 48 V DC POWER SOURCE
INSTALLATION CABLE

DC INPUT

CORD BUSH

BASE
(SN1685
BASEUC)

AC CORD-B
FRONT
TERMINAL BLOCKS

119

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of DC Power Cable


(1)
(2)

Confirm the connection of power output cables, as shown below (These cables are pre-installed).
For PIM0, connect the PWR CNT CA-E to the SIG connector on the PZ-PW135 card and the
PWR1 connector on the BWB.
For PIM1 to PIM7, connect the PWR CNT CA-D to the SIG connector on the PZ-PW135 card
and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.

PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E

250 mm (9.8 inch)

300 mm (11.8 inch)


550 mm (21.7 inch)

Cable Connection between PZ-PW135 and BWB


PIM
PZ-PW135

BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)


PWR1

SIG

PWR0A
PWR0B
CARD SLOT AREA

PWR0C

LTC CONNECTOR AREA

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, 27 V, E)


POWER OUTPUT CABLE (48 V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)
PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)
PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)

120

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST


AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System
Precautions
(1)

NOTE:

Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on.
- Make sure that the AC120 V/240 V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for
each country (AC120 V or AC240 V).
PZ-PW126 card does not have this switch.
SW2
100 V/120 V

240 V

- Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to match the
kind of battery being used:
SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1
2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2

OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON

(2)

When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/
unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

(3)

Immediately follow the instructions below if the MJ lamp on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 lights
up or smoke or a nasty smell is produced during the test:
a) Turn power off of all PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
b) Unplug the AC code from the wall outlet.
c) Carefully check for causes of the failure occurring.

NOTE:
(4)

Do not turn power on again until the cause is detected.


When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control
for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is
off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switches of other PIMs are
left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these circumstances.

121

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Power Routing
NOTE 1: PN-4LCD/4LCF/4LCL/4LCW card provides +80 V on-board power supply (+80 VOBP).
NOTE 2: PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN, PN-2LDTA, PN-2ODTA/2ODTB card provides 48 V on-board power supply (48 VOBP).

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
TO PIM2

+5 V

PIM1

-27 V
-27 V
CR
+90 V

AC

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
PWR CA-A

NOTE 1
+5 V
+5 V
+80 VOBP

BATTERY

-27 V

-27 V
CR

+80 V
PIM0
-27 V
-5 V

CR

AC
+90 V

NOTE 2
-5 V
+5 V
-48 VOBP

AC CORD-B

-48 V
-27 V

CR
PN-8LCAA
+5 V
-27 V
-5 V
CR
+90 V

AC CORD-D
TERMINAL
BLOCKS

TO AC MAINS INPUT

122

BASE

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Checking for Supply Voltage


Start
Checking power cable
and
grounding conductor

Testing for input power

Connecting AC power

Turning power ON

Verifying power
pilot lamp ON

Testing for
output voltage

Before connecting AC Cord, verify:


- that the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card is positioned to OFF;
- that the AC Cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.

Use a tester to verify that the input power is AC12010 V or AC24010 V.

Plug the AC cord into a wall outlet.

Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards on PIM1 to


PIM7 to ON. Then, turn the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on
PIM0 to ON last of all.
Verify that the ON lamp on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card lights up.

Measure the output voltage: 20 V should be observed at GND and


27 V terminals of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card. See Confirming Output
Voltage.
Page 124

End

Heat Run Test


Turn the SW1 switch ON. Keep it on for 5 minutes to check for no abnormal voltage. After completing the test, turn OFF the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM0. Then, turn OFF
the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.

123

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Confirming Output Voltage


TESTER

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
DC100 V

MJ
MN
ON

-27 V
FG
GND

O I

SW1

TO

FRAME GROUND

TERMINAL IN PIM
TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE

124

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

48 V DC Power Supply System


Precautions
(1)

When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW135 card, do not plug/unplug this
circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

(2)

Immediately follow the instructions below if the MJ lamp on the PZ-PW135 lights up or smoke
or a nasty smell is produced during the test:
a) Turn power off of all PZ-PW135 cards.
b) Unplug the DC code from the wall outlet.
c) Carefully check for causes of the failure occurring.

NOTE:
(3)

Do not turn power on again until the cause is detected.


When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control
for the PZ-PW135 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off, no
power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switches of other PIMs are left on.

125

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Power Routing
NOTE 1: PN-4LCD/4LCF/4LCL/4LCW card provides +80 V on-board power supply (+80 VOBP).
NOTE 2: PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN, PN-2LDTA, PN-2ODTA/2ODTB card provides 48 V on-board power supply (48 VOBP).

PZ-PW135
TO PIM2

+5 V

PIM1

-27 V
CR
-48 V

DC IN

PZ-PW135
NOTE 1
+5 V
+5 V
+80 VOBP
-27 V

+80 V
PIM0
-27 V

CR

-5 V

CR

DC IN
-48 V

NOTE 2
-5 V
+5 V
-48 VOBP

AC CORD-B

-48 V
-27 V

CR

INSTALLATION
CABLE

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

126

BASE

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Checking for Supply Voltage


Start
Checking power cable
and
grounding conductor

Testing for input power

Before connecting DC Cord, verify:


- that the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card is positioned to OFF;
- that the DC Cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.

Use a tester to verify that the input power is 48 V DC on the output of external
48 V DC Power Supply (Rectificador), or the Power Supply Cable (Installation Cable).

Connecting DC power

Connect the Power Supply Cable (Installation Cable) to Terminal Blocks on


BASE.

Turning power ON

Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards on PIM1 to PIM7 to ON.
Then, turn the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card on PIM0 to ON last of all.

Verifying power
pilot lamp ON

Testing for
output voltage

Verify that the ON lamp on the PZ-PW135 card lights up.

Measure the output voltage: 20 V should be observed at GND and


27 V terminals of the PZ-PW135 card. See Confirming Output
Voltage.
Page 124

End

Heat Run Test


Turn the SW1 switch ON. Keep it on for 5 minutes to check for no abnormal voltage. After completing the test, turn OFF the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card on PIM0. Then, turn OFF the SW1
switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards.

127

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Confirming Output Voltage


TESTER

PZ-PW135
DC100 V

MJ
MN
ON

-27 V
FG
GND

O I

SW

TO

FRAME GROUND

TERMINAL IN PIM
TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE

128

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

BATTERY CONNECTION
WARNING
TURN OFF AC POWER BEFORE CONNECTING BATTERIES.

CAUTION
1. 24 V batteries must be used in this system.
2. If battery terminals (+, ) come in contact with the module while connecting the battery cable
to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card or the BWB may be broken. Therefore, you must perform work in accordance with the following steps when mounting or removing the batteries.
(1) When mounting batteries:
(a) Connect the battery cable to the batteries.
(b) Mount the batteries into the appointed position of the PIM or the BATTM.
(c) Connect the battery cable to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(2)

When removing batteries:


(a) Disconnect the battery cable from the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(b) Remove the batteries from the PIM or the BATTM.
Continued on next page

Recommended Battery
Internal Battery:

YUASA
MATSUSHITA

type NPH-3.2-12
type LCR-12V3.4NE

External Battery:
(BATTM)

YUASA
MATSUSHITA

type NP-24-12B
type LCL-12V-24

129

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

CAUTION
3. Battery Replacement Table and Battery Warnings
The label which shows battery replacement table and battery warnings is attached to the
reverse side of Front Cover for PIM and BATTM.
During the battery installation process, the warning statements must be observed. When
replacing batteries, the battery replacement table should be observed in order to increase battery life and insure a safe operation.

FRONT COVER
LABEL
PIM/BATTM

CAUTION

TO PREVENT INJURY AND SKIN BURN,


PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING.

o DO NOT STRIKE A MATCH OR CAUSE A SPARK IN


VICINITY OF BATTERY.
o PLACE THE EQUIPMENT WELL VENTILATED
AREA.
o DO NOT SHORT.
o REPLACE BATTERY ONLY AFTER BATTERY
GASES HAVE BEEN DISPERSED.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT TABLE


INSTALLATION DATE:
REPLACEMENT DATE:
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
(SYSTEM)
REPLACEMENT INTERVAL

3 YEARS

2 YEARS

1YEAR

ELECTROLYTE LEAKAGE, FIRE, SMOKE, OR OTHER


HAZARDS MAY RESULT IF THE BATTERY IS NOT REPLACED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFIED INTERVALS.

130

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

Internal Battery Connection


(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Connect the BATT CA INT cable to the batteries as shown below.


Mount the battery unit (24 V DC, 3.2-3.4 AH) into the PIM.
Plug the BATT CA INT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
Secure the batteries and battery cable using tie wraps.

Internal Battery Mounting


DIMENSION OF BATTERY
67 mm
(2.6 inch)
60 mm
(2.4 inch)

PIM
134 mm
(5.3 inch)
Recommended Batteries
Yuasa NPH-3.2-12
Matsushita LCR-12V 3.4 NE

TO BATT1
CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121
/PZ-PW126

BATT CA INT

RED

+
+

BLUE/BLACK

BLACK
INTERNAL BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 3.2 TO 3.4 AH)

Continued on next page

131

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

Internal Battery Mounting

TIE WRAP

132

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

(5)

When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA INT and the PWR
CA-A as shown below.

Internal Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration


NOTE 1: One Internal Battery unit (24 V DC, 3.2-3.4 AH) can be mounted in each PIM.
NOTE 2: Internal Batteries are multi-connected for each two PIMs.

PWR

BATT CA INT

PWR

BATT CA INT

PIM3

PIM7

PWR CA-A

PWR CA-A
PWR

BATT CA INT

PWR

BATT CA INT

PIM2

PIM6

PWR

BATT CA INT

PWR

BATT CA INT

PIM1

PIM5

PWR CA-A

PWR CA-A
PWR

BATT CA INT

PWR

BATT CA INT

PIM4

PIM0

133

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

External / BATTM Battery Connection


(1)
(2)
(3)

Connect the BATT CA EXT cable to the batteries as shown below.


Mount the battery units (24 V DC, 24 AH per unit) into the Battery Module (BATTM), if the BATTM
required.
Plug the BATT CA EXT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card in
PIM0 or PIM4.

NOTE:

Screws are attached to the BATTM.

Battery Mounting into BATTM


DIMENSION OF BATTERY
175 mm
(6.9 inch)

TO BATT1 CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
IN PIM0/PIM4

125 mm
(4.9 inch)

BATT CA EXT
165 mm
(6.5 inch)
Recommended Batteries
Yuasa NP-24-12B
Matsushita LCL-12V-24

BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)

BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)

Continued on next page

134

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

(4)
(5)

Hang the hooks of the BATTERY STOPPERs on the BATTM.


Slide the BATTERY STOPPERs left and secure them with four screws.

NOTE:

The BATTERY STOPPERs and screws are attached to the BATTM.

Battery Mounted into BATTM


TO BATT1 CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
IN PIM0/P

BATTERY STOPPER

BATTM

HOOK
BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)

SCREW

Continued on next page

135

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

(6)

When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA EXT and the PWR
CA-A as shown below.

External/BATTM Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration


NOTE 1: One pair each of battery unit (24 V DC, 24 AH) can be housed in a BATTM, for each two PIMs.
NOTE 2: External Batteries are multi-connected for each four PIMs.

PWR

PWR

PIM3

PIM7

PWR

PWR
CA-A

PWR

PWR
CA-A

PIM2

PIM6

PWR

PWR

PIM1

PIM5

PWR

PWR

PIM0

PIM4
BATT CA EXT

BATTM/
EXTERNAL BATT

BATT CA EXT

BATTM/
EXTERNAL BATT

136

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

CABLE RUNNING TO MDF


Installation of External MDF
Secure the external MDF onto the floor or the wall.
Mount the required MDF components.
If required, install the cable ducts for the cables to be laid between the MDF and the Main Equipment.
In this case, confirm the locations of the cable holes for the Main Equipment.

MDF Cable Hole Location

MODULE

BASE

FRONT

: CABLE HOLE

137

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cable
To facilitate the termination of the 25 pair cables (MDF cables) from the system to the MDF shown below,
the length of each cable to be used should be predetermined according to the distance between the MDF
and the system. Each cable should be labeled at both ends using a cable number or cable designation as
shown below.

MDF Cable
CHAMP CONNECTOR

TO PIM

TWISTED 25 PAIR CABLES

TO MDF

138

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cables for each PIM


FROM

TO

CABLE
DESIGNATION

MDF

0 LTC0

MODULE

CONNECTION

CABLE
NUMBER

PIM0

LTC0

LTC1

0 LTC1

LTC2

0 LTC2

LTC3

0 LTC3

LTC0

LTC1

1 LTC1

LTC2

1 LTC2

LTC3

1 LTC3

LTC0

LTC1

10

2 LTC1

LTC2

11

2 LTC2

LTC3

12

2 LTC3

LTC0

13

LTC1

14

3 LTC1

LTC2

15

3 LTC2

LTC3

16

3 LTC3

LTC0

17

LTC1

18

4 LTC1

LTC2

19

4 LTC2

LTC3

20

4 LTC3

LTC0

21

LTC1

22

5 LTC1

LTC2

23

5 LTC2

LTC3

24

5 LTC3

PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

PIM4

PIM5

MDF

MDF

MDF

MDF

MDF

1 LTC0

2 LTC0

3 LTC0

4 LTC0

5 LTC0

Continued on next page

139

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cables for each PIM


FROM
MODULE

CONNECTION

CABLE
NUMBER

PIM6

LTC0

25

LTC1

26

6 LTC1

LTC2

27

6 LTC2

LTC3

28

6 LTC3

LTC0

29

LTC1

30

7 LTC1

LTC2

31

7 LTC2

LTC3

32

7 LTC3

PIM7

140

TO

CABLE
DESIGNATION

MDF

6 LTC0

MDF

7 LTC0

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

Cable Running to External MDF


(1)

When using the cable hole of the BASE, bring the MDF cable up to the Main Equipment through the
cable hole of the BASE.

(2)

When using the cable hole of the PIM, make the cable hole on the right side of PIM. Then, bring the
MDF cable up to PIM0 through the cable hole of the BASE, and bring the MDF cable up to the other
PIM through the cable hole (right side) of each PIM.

Making Cable Hole on PIM

FRONT

CUT OFF THE PLATE.

FILE THE PROJECTIONS.

141

PUT IN THE EDGINGS.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

(3)

Connect the champ connector of each MDF cable to the LTC connector located on the PIM using the
screws provided, as shown below.

(4)

Secure the MDF cables to the PIM using tie wraps.

Cable Running to External MDF


(a) Using cable hole of BASE

PIM3

LTC CONNECTOR
PIM2
CHAMP CONNECTOR

PIM1

PIM0

BATTM

TO MDF
FRONT

Continued on next page

142

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

Cable Running to the External MDF


(b) Using cable hole of PIM

PIM3

TO MDF

LTC CONNECTOR
PIM2
CHAMP CONNECTOR

TO MDF

PIM1

TO MDF

PIM0

TO MDF
BATTM

FRONT

143

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF


Cable Connection to MDF
Connect the cables to the MDF referring to below.

Card Slots and the LTC Connectors

PFT

MP12/FP12

LT11/AP11

LT10/AP10

LT09/AP09

LT08/AP08

LT07/AP07

LT06/AP06

LT05/AP05

LT04/AP04

LT03/AP03

LT02/AP02

LT01/AP01

LT00/AP00

VM

PIM0 - 7

AC/DC
PWR

LTC0

DC/DC
PWR

LTC1

LTC2

LTC3

BWB

FRONT

LTC Connector Accommodation


LTC CONNECTOR

CARD SLOT NUMBER

LTC0

LT00 - LT02/AP00 - AP02

LTC1

LT03 - LT05/AP03 - AP05

LTC2

LT06 - LT08/AP06 - AP08

LTC3

LT09 - LT11/AP09 - AP11

144

REMARKS

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

Location of Each LEN


This figure shows the relationship between each Line Equipment Number (LEN) and each Card Slot Number (LT Number).
(1)

LEN of CM14
LEN 00000 - 01127 (PIM0 - 3)
LEN 02000 - 03127 (PIM4 - 7)

(2)

Page 146
Page 147

LEN of CM10
LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3)
LEN 400 - 763 (PIM4 - 7)

Page 148
Page 149

145

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LEN 00000 - 01127 (PIM0 - 3)

Location of each LEN (CM14)


XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
XXYYY
(LTXX)

LEN of CM14
(LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER)
XX : FP NUMBER (00-31)[For Series 3200 R6.2/R7 or earlier]
FP NUMBER (00-63)[For Series 3300 or later]
YYY : PORT NUMBER (000-127)
CARD SLOT NUMBER

PIM3

01071
01070
01069
01068
01067
01066
01065
01064
(LT00)

01079
01078
01077
01076
01075
01074
01073
01072
(LT01)

01087
01086
01085
01084
01083
01082
01081
01080
(LT02)

01095
01094
01093
01092
01091
01090
01089
01088
(LT03)

01103
01102
01101
01100
01099
01098
01097
01096
(LT04)

01111
01110
01109
01108
01107
01106
01105
01104
(LT05)

01119
01118
01117
01116
01115
01114
01113
01112
(LT06)

01127
01126
01125
01124
01123
01122
01121
01120
(LT07)

PIM2

01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)

01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)

01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)

01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)

01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)

01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)

01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)

01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)

PIM1

00071
00070
00069
00068
00067
00066
00065
00064
(LT00)

00079
00078
00077
00076
00075
00074
00073
00072
(LT01)

00087
00086
00085
00084
00083
00082
00081
00080
(LT02)

00095
00094
00093
00092
00091
00090
00089
00088
(LT03)

00103
00102
00101
00100
00099
00098
00097
00096
(LT04)

00111
00110
00109
00108
00107
00106
00105
00104
(LT05)

00119
00118
00117
00116
00115
00114
00113
00112
(LT06)

00127
00126
00125
00124
00123
00122
00121
00120
(LT07)

PIM0

00007
00006
00005
00004
00003
00002
00001
00000
(LT00)

00015
00014
00013
00012
00011
00010
00009
00008
(LT01)

00023
00022
00021
00020
00019
00018
00017
00016
(LT02)

00031
00030
00029
00028
00027
00026
00025
00024
(LT03)

00039
00038
00037
00036
00035
00034
00033
00032
(LT04)

00047
00046
00045
00044
00043
00042
00041
00040
(LT05)

00055
00054
00053
00052
00051
00050
00049
00048
(LT06)

00063
00062
00061
00060
00059
00058
00057
00056
(LT07)

01103
01102
01101
01100
(LT08)

01111
01110
01109
01108
(LT09)

01119
01118
01117
01116
(LT10)

01127
01126
01125
01124
(LT11)

01055
01054
01053
01052
(LT10)

01063
01062
01061
01060
(LT11)

00119
00118
00117
00116
(LT10)

00127
00126
00125
00124
(LT11)

00055
00054
00053
00052
(LT10)

00063
00062
00061
00060
(LT11)

*
01039
01038
01037
01036
(LT08)

01047
01046
01045
01044
(LT09)

*
00103
00102
00101
00100
(LT08)

00111
00110
00109
00108
(LT09)

*
00039
00038
00037
00036
(LT08)

00047
00046
00045
00044
(LT09)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

146

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LEN 02000 - 03127 (PIM4 - 7)

Location of each LEN (CM14)

PIM7

03071
03070
03069
03068
03067
03066
03065
03064
(LT00)

03079
03078
03077
03076
03075
03074
03073
03072
(LT01)

03087
03086
03085
03084
03083
03082
03081
03080
(LT02)

03095
03094
03093
03092
03091
03090
03089
03088
(LT03)

03103
03102
03101
03100
03099
03098
03097
03096
(LT04)

03111
03110
03109
03108
03107
03106
03105
03104
(LT05)

03119
03118
03117
03116
03115
03114
03113
03112
(LT06)

03127
03126
03125
03124
03123
03122
03121
03120
(LT07)

PIM6

03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)

03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)

03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)

03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)

03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)

03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)

03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)

03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)

PIM5

02071
02070
02069
02068
02067
02066
02065
02064
(LT00)

02079
02078
02077
02076
02075
02074
02073
02072
(LT01)

02087
02086
02085
02084
02083
02082
02081
02080
(LT02)

02095
02094
02093
02092
02091
02090
02089
02088
(LT03)

02103
02102
02101
02100
02099
02098
02097
02096
(LT04)

02111
02110
02109
02108
02107
02106
02105
02104
(LT05)

02119
02118
02117
02116
02115
02114
02113
02112
(LT06)

02127
02126
02125
02124
02123
02122
02121
02120
(LT07)

PIM4

02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)

02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)

02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)

02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)

02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)

02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
02042
02041
02040
(LT05)

02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)

02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)

03103
03102
03101
03100
(LT08)

03111
03110
03109
03108
(LT09)

03119
03118
03117
03116
(LT10)

03127
03126
03125
03124
(LT11)

03055
03054
03053
03052
(LT10)

03063
03062
03061
03060
(LT11)

02119
02118
02117
02116
(LT10)

02127
02126
02125
02124
(LT11)

02055
02054
02053
02052
(LT10)

02063
02062
02061
02060
(LT11)

*
03039
03038
03037
03036
(LT08)

03047
03046
03045
03044
(LT09)

*
02103
02102
02101
02100
(LT08)

02111
02110
02109
02108
(LT09)

*
02039
02038
02037
02036
(LT08)

02047
02046
02045
02044
(LT09)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

147

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3)

Location of each LEN (CM10)


XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
(LTXX)

LEN of CM10
(LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER)
X : PIM NUMBER (0-7)
YY : PORT NUMBER (00-63)
CARD SLOT NUMBER

PIM3

307
306
305
304
303
302
301
300
(LT00)

315
314
313
312
311
310
309
308
(LT01)

323
322
321
320
319
318
317
316
(LT02)

331
330
329
328
327
326
325
324
(LT03)

339
338
337
336
335
334
333
332
(LT04)

347
346
345
344
343
342
341
340
(LT05)

355
354
353
352
351
350
349
348
(LT06)

363
362
361
360
359
358
357
356
(LT07)

PIM2

207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
(LT00)

215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
(LT01)

223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
(LT02)

231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
(LT03)

239
238
237
236
235
234
233
232
(LT04)

247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
(LT05)

255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
(LT06)

263
262
261
260
259
258
257
256
(LT07)

PIM1

107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
(LT00)

115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
(LT01)

123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
(LT02)

131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
(LT03)

139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
(LT04)

147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
(LT05)

155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
(LT06)

163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
(LT07)

PIM0

007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
(LT00)

015
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
(LT01)

023
022
021
020
019
018
017
016
(LT02)

031
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
(LT03)

039
038
037
036
035
034
033
032
(LT04)

047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
(LT05)

055
054
053
052
051
050
049
048
(LT06)

063
062
061
060
059
058
057
056
(LT07)

339
338
337
336
(LT08)

347
346
345
344
(LT09)

355
354
353
352
(LT10)

363
362
361
360
(LT11)

255
254
253
252
(LT10)

263
262
261
260
(LT11)

155
154
153
152
(LT10)

163
162
161
160
(LT11)

055
054
053
052
(LT10)

063
062
061
060
(LT11)

*
239
238
237
236
(LT08)

247
246
245
244
(LT09)

*
139
138
137
136
(LT08)

147
146
145
144
(LT09)

*
039
038
037
036
(LT08)

047
046
045
044
(LT09)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

148

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LEN 400 - 763 (PIM4 - 7)

Location of each LEN (CM10)

PIM7

707
706
705
704
703
702
701
700
(LT00)

715
714
713
712
711
710
709
708
(LT01)

723
722
721
720
719
718
717
716
(LT02)

731
730
729
728
727
726
725
724
(LT03)

739
738
737
736
735
734
733
732
(LT04)

747
746
745
744
743
742
741
740
(LT05)

755
754
753
752
751
750
749
748
(LT06)

763
762
761
760
759
758
757
756
(LT07)

PIM6

607
606
605
604
603
602
601
600
(LT00)

615
614
613
612
611
610
609
608
(LT01)

623
622
621
620
619
618
617
616
(LT02)

631
630
629
628
627
626
625
624
(LT03)

639
638
637
636
635
634
633
632
(LT04)

647
646
645
644
643
642
641
640
(LT05)

655
654
653
652
651
650
649
648
(LT06)

663
662
661
660
659
658
657
656
(LT07)

PIM5

507
506
505
504
503
502
501
500
(LT00)

515
514
513
512
511
510
509
508
(LT01)

523
522
521
520
519
518
517
516
(LT02)

531
530
529
528
527
526
525
524
(LT03)

539
538
537
536
535
534
533
532
(LT04)

547
546
545
544
543
542
541
540
(LT05)

555
554
553
552
551
550
549
548
(LT06)

563
562
561
560
559
558
557
556
(LT07)

PIM4

407
406
405
404
403
402
401
400
(LT00)

415
414
413
412
411
410
409
408
(LT01)

423
422
421
420
419
418
417
416
(LT02)

431
430
429
428
427
426
425
424
(LT03)

439
438
437
436
435
434
433
432
(LT04)

447
446
445
444
443
442
441
440
(LT05)

455
454
453
452
451
450
449
448
(LT06)

463
462
461
460
459
458
457
456
(LT07)

739
738
737
736
(LT08)

747
746
745
744
(LT09)

755
754
753
752
(LT10)

763
762
761
760
(LT11)

655
654
653
652
(LT10)

663
662
661
660
(LT11)

555
554
553
552
(LT10)

563
562
561
560
(LT11)

455
454
453
452
(LT10)

463
462
461
460
(LT11)

*
639
638
637
636
(LT08)

647
646
645
644
(LT09)

*
539
538
537
536
(LT08)

547
546
545
544
(LT09)

*
439
438
437
436
(LT08)

447
446
445
444
(LT09)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

149

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


This figure shows the LTC Connector Pin Arrangement.
(1)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

(2)

PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)


PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

Page 151
Page 152
Page 153
Page 154
Page 155
Page 156
Page 157
Page 158

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)


PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

Page 159
Page 160
Page 161
Page 162
Page 163
Page 164
Page 165
Page 166

150

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)


LTC0
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25 MJ 50 MN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN00000
00001
00002
00003
LT00/AP00
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
LT01/AP01
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
00017
00018
00019
LT02/AP02
00020
00021
00022
LEN00023

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN00048
00049
00050
00051
LT06/AP06
00052
00053
00054
00055
00056
00057
00058
00059
LT07/AP07
00060
00061
00062
00063
00036
00037
LT08/AP08*
00038
LEN00039

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN00024
00025
LT03/AP03
00026
00027
00028
00029
00030
00031
00032
00033
LT04/AP04
00034
00035
00036
00037
00038
00039
00040
00041
LT05/AP05
00042
00043
00044
00045
00046
LEN00047

LEN00044
00045
LT09/AP09*
00046
00047

00052
00053
LT10/AP10*
00054
00055

00060
00061
LT11/AP11*
00062
LEN00063

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

151

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN00064
00065
00066
00067
LT00/AP00
00068
00069
00070
00071
00072
00073
00074
00075
LT01/AP01
00076
00077
00078
00079
00080
00081
00082
00083
LT02/AP02
00084
00085
00086
LEN00087

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN00112
00113
00114
00115
LT06/AP06
00116
00117
00118
00119
00120
00121
00122
00123
LT07/AP07
00124
00125
00126
00127
00100
00101
LT08/AP08*
00102
LEN00103

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN00088
00089
LT03/AP03
00090
00091
00092
00093
00094
00095
00096
00097
LT04/AP04
00098
00099
00100
00101
00102
00103
00104
00105
LT05/AP05
00106
00107
00108
00109
00110
LEN00111

LEN00108
00109
LT09/AP09*
00110
00111

00116
00117
LT10/AP10*
00118
00119

00124
00125
LT11/AP11*
00126
LEN00127

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

152

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN01000
01001
01002
01003
LT00/AP00
01004
01005
01006
01007
01008
01009
01010
01011
LT01/AP01
01012
01013
01014
01015
01016
01017
01018
01019
LT02/AP02
01020
01021
01022
LEN01023

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN01048
01049
01050
01051
LT06/AP06
01052
01053
01054
01055
01056
01057
01058
01059
LT07/AP07
01060
01061
01062
01063
01036
01037
LT08/AP08*
01038
LEN01039

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN01024
01025
LT03/AP03
01026
01027
01028
01029
01030
01031
01032
01033
LT04/AP04
01034
01035
01036
01037
01038
01039
01040
01041
LT05/AP05
01042
01043
01044
01045
01046
LEN01047

LEN01044
01045
LT09/AP09*
01046
01047

01052
01053
LT10/AP10*
01054
01055

01060
01061
LT11/AP11*
01062
LEN01063

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

153

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN01064
01065
01066
01067
LT00/AP00
01068
01069
01070
01071
01072
01073
01074
01075
LT01/AP01
01076
01077
01078
01079
01080
01081
01082
01083
LT02/AP02
01084
01085
01086
LEN01087

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN01112
01113
01114
01115
LT06/AP06
01116
01117
01118
01119
01120
01121
01122
01123
LT07/AP07
01124
01125
01126
01127
01100
01101
LT08/AP08*
01102
LEN01103

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN01088
01089
LT03/AP03
01090
01091
01092
01093
01094
01095
01096
01097
LT04/AP04
01098
01099
01100
01101
01102
01103
01104
01105
LT05/AP05
01106
01107
01108
01109
01110
LEN01111

LEN01108
01109
LT09/AP09*
01110
01111

01116
01117
LT10/AP10*
01118
01119

01124
01125
LT11/AP11*
01126
LEN01127

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

154

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN02000
02001
02002
02003
LT00/AP00
02004
02005
02006
02007
02008
02009
02010
02011
LT01/AP01
02012
02013
02014
02015
02016
02017
02018
02019
LT02/AP02
02020
02021
02022
LEN02023

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN02048
02049
02050
02051
LT06/AP06
02052
02053
02054
02055
02056
02057
02058
02059
LT07/AP07
02060
02061
02062
02063
02036
02037
LT08/AP08*
02038
LEN02039

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN02024
02025
LT03/AP03
02026
02027
02028
02029
02030
02031
02032
02033
LT04/AP04
02034
02035
02036
02037
02038
02039
02040
02041
LT05/AP05
02042
02043
02044
02045
02046
LEN02047

LEN02044
02045
LT09/AP09*
02046
02047

02052
02053
LT10/AP10*
02054
02055

02060
02061
LT11/AP11*
02062
LEN02063

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

155

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN02064
02065
02066
02067
LT00/AP00
02068
02069
02070
02071
02072
02073
02074
02075
LT01/AP01
02076
02077
02078
02079
02080
02081
02082
02083
LT02/AP02
02084
02085
02086
LEN02087

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN02112
02113
02114
02115
LT06/AP06
02116
02117
02118
02119
02120
02121
02122
02123
LT07/AP07
02124
02125
02126
02127
02100
02101
LT08/AP08*
02102
LEN02103

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN02088
02089
LT03/AP03
02090
02091
02092
02093
02094
02095
02096
02097
LT04/AP04
02098
02099
02100
02101
02102
02103
02104
02105
LT05/AP05
02106
02107
02108
02109
02110
LEN02111

LEN02108
02109
LT09/AP09*
02110
02111

02116
02117
LT10/AP10*
02118
02119

02124
02125
LT11/AP11*
02126
LEN02127

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

156

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN03000
03001
03002
03003
LT00/AP00
03004
03005
03006
03007
03008
03009
03010
03011
LT01/AP01
03012
03013
03014
03015
03016
03017
03018
03019
LT02/AP02
03020
03021
03022
LEN03023

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN03048
03049
03050
03051
LT06/AP06
03052
03053
03054
03055
03056
03057
03058
03059
LT07/AP07
03060
03061
03062
03063
03036
03037
LT08/AP08*
03038
LEN03039

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN03024
03025
LT03/AP03
03026
03027
03028
03029
03030
03031
03032
03033
LT04/AP04
03034
03035
03036
03037
03038
03039
03040
03041
LT05/AP05
03042
03043
03044
03045
03046
LEN03047

LEN03044
03045
LT09/AP09*
03046
03047

03052
03053
LT10/AP10*
03054
03055

03060
03061
LT11/AP11*
03062
LEN03063

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

157

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN03064
03065
03066
03067
LT00/AP00
03068
03069
03070
03071
03072
03073
03074
03075
LT01/AP01
03076
03077
03078
03079
03080
03081
03082
03083
LT02/AP02
03084
03085
03086
LEN03087

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN03112
03113
03114
03115
LT06/AP06
03116
03117
03118
03119
03120
03121
03122
03123
LT07/AP07
03124
03125
03126
03127
03100
03101
LT08/AP08*
03102
LEN03103

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN03088
03089
LT03/AP03
03090
03091
03092
03093
03094
03095
03096
03097
LT04/AP04
03098
03099
03100
03101
03102
03103
03104
03105
LT05/AP05
03106
03107
03108
03109
03110
LEN03111

LEN03108
03109
LT09/AP09*
03110
03111

03116
03117
LT10/AP10*
03118
03119

03124
03125
LT11/AP11*
03126
LEN03127

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

158

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)


LTC0
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25 MJ 50 MN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN000
001
002
003
LT00/AP00
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
LT01/AP01
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
LT02/AP02
020
021
022
LEN023

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN048
049
050
051
LT06/AP06
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
LT07/AP07
060
061
062
063
036
037
LT08/AP08*
038
LEN039

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN024
025
LT03/AP03
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
LT04/AP04
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
LT05/AP05
042
043
044
045
046
LEN047

LEN044
045
LT09/AP09*
046
047

052
053
LT10/AP10*
054
055

060
061
LT11/AP11*
062
LEN063

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

159

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN100
101
102
103
LT00/AP00
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
LT01/AP01
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
LT02/AP02
120
121
122
LEN123

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN148
149
150
151
LT06/AP06
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
LT07/AP07
160
161
162
163
136
137
LT08/AP08*
138
LEN139

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN124
125
LT03/AP03
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
LT04/AP04
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
LT05/AP05
142
143
144
145
146
LEN147

LEN144
145
LT09/AP09*
146
147

152
153
LT10/AP10*
154
155

160
161
LT11/AP11*
162
LEN163

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

160

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN200
201
202
203
LT00/AP00
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
LT01/AP01
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
LT02/AP02
220
221
222
LEN223

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN248
249
250
251
LT06/AP06
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
LT07/AP07
260
261
262
263
236
237
LT08/AP08*
238
LEN239

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN224
225
LT03/AP03
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
LT04/AP04
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
LT05/AP05
242
243
244
245
246
LEN247

LEN244
245
LT09/AP09*
246
247

252
253
LT10/AP10*
254
255

260
261
LT11/AP11*
262
LEN263

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

161

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN300
301
302
303
LT00/AP00
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
LT01/AP01
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
LT02/AP02
320
321
322
LEN323

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN348
349
350
351
LT06/AP06
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
LT07/AP07
360
361
362
363
336
337
LT08/AP08*
338
LEN339

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN324
325
LT03/AP03
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
LT04/AP04
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
LT05/AP05
342
343
344
345
346
LEN347

LEN344
345
LT09/AP09*
346
347

352
353
LT10/AP10*
354
355

360
361
LT11/AP11*
362
LEN363

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

162

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN400
401
402
403
LT00/AP00
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
LT01/AP01
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
LT02/AP02
420
421
422
LEN423

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN448
449
450
451
LT06/AP06
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
LT07/AP07
460
461
462
463
436
437
LT08/AP08*
438
LEN439

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN424
425
LT03/AP03
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
LT04/AP04
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
LT05/AP05
442
443
444
445
446
LEN447

LEN444
445
LT09/AP09*
446
447

452
453
LT10/AP10*
454
455

460
461
LT11/AP11*
462
LEN463

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

163

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN500
501
502
503
LT00/AP00
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
LT01/AP01
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
LT02/AP02
520
521
522
LEN523

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN548
549
550
551
LT06/AP06
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
LT07/AP07
560
561
562
563
536
537
LT08/AP08*
538
LEN539

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN524
525
LT03/AP03
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
LT04/AP04
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
LT05/AP05
542
543
544
545
546
LEN547

LEN544
545
LT09/AP09*
546
547

552
553
LT10/AP10*
554
555

560
561
LT11/AP11*
562
LEN563

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

164

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN600
601
602
603
LT00/AP00
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
LT01/AP01
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
LT02/AP02
620
621
622
LEN623

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN648
649
650
651
LT06/AP06
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
LT07/AP07
660
661
662
663
636
637
LT08/AP08*
638
LEN639

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN624
625
LT03/AP03
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
LT04/AP04
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
LT05/AP05
642
643
644
645
646
LEN647

LEN644
645
LT09/AP09*
646
647

652
653
LT10/AP10*
654
655

660
661
LT11/AP11*
662
LEN663

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

165

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN700
701
702
703
LT00/AP00
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
LT01/AP01
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
LT02/AP02
720
721
722
LEN723

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN748
749
750
751
LT06/AP06
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
LT07/AP07
760
761
762
763
736
737
LT08/AP08*
738
LEN739

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

LEN724
725
LT03/AP03
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
LT04/AP04
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
LT05/AP05
742
743
744
745
746
LEN747

LEN744
745
LT09/AP09*
746
747

752
753
LT10/AP10*
754
755

760
761
LT11/AP11*
762
LEN763

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

166

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

MDF Cross Connections


This table shows the cross connections on the MDF for LTC0 - LTC3.

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection


NOTE 1: PIN No.46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC3 cannot be used.
NOTE 2: PIN No.46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC2 and LTC3 cannot be used.
NOTE 3: For the Digital Trunk Interface card, use the different LTC connector from the analog line/trunk
card. The digital line should be separated from the analog line.
TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN

RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE

CO

LDT

2-W
E&M

4-W
E&M

DID

SLT

8COT 4COT 4LDT 2LDT 2ODT 4ODT 2ODT 4ODT 4DIT 2DIT 8LC 4LC LLC
26

WH-BL

GN

T0

T0

T0

T0

T0

T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0

BL-WH

RD

R0

R0

R0

R0

R0

R0 TxR0 TxR0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0

27

WH-OR

BK

T1

T1

T1

T1

RcvT0 RcvT0 T1

OR-WH

YL

R1

R1

R1

R1

RcvR0 RcvR0 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1

28

WH-GN

GN

T2

T2

T2

T2

T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2

T2

GN-WH

RD

R2

R2

R2

R2

R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2

R2 R2 R2

29

WH-BR

BK

T3

T3

T3

RcvT1 RcvT1 T3

T3

BR-WH

YL

R3

R3

R3

RcvR1 RcvR1 R3

R3 R3 R3

30

WH-SL

GN

SL-WH

31

T0

T1

T0

T1

T4

T2

TxT2

T4

RD

R4

R2

TxR2

R4

RD-BL

BK

T5

RcvT2

T5

BL-RD

YL

R5

RcvR2

R5

32

RD-OR

GN

OR-RD

33
8

NOTE 1

T6

T3

TxT3

T6

RD

R6

R3

TxR3

R6

RD-GN

BK

T7

RcvT3

T7

GN-RD

YL

R7

RcvR3

R7

T0

T1

T2

T3

T0

T1

T2

T3

Continued on next page

167

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN

RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE

CO

LDT

2-W
E&M

4-W
E&M

DID

SLT

8COT 4COT 4LDT 2LDT 2ODT 4ODT 2ODT 4ODT 4DIT 2DIT 8LC 4LC LLC
34

RD-BR

GN

T0

T0

T0

T0

T0

T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0

BR-RD

RD

R0

R0

R0

R0

R0

R0 TxR0 TxR0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0

35

RD-SL

BK

T1

T1

T1

T1

T1

RcvT0 RcvT0 T1

10

SL-RD

YL

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

RcvR0 RcvR0 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1

36

BK-BL

GN

T2

T2

T2

T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2

T2

11

BL-BK

RD

R2

R2

R2

R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2

R2 R2 R2

37

BK-OR

BK

T3

T3

T3

RcvT1 RcvT1 T3

T3

12

OR-BK

YL

R3

R3

R3

RcvR1 RcvR1 R3

R3 R3 R3

38

BK-GN

GN

13

GN-BK

39

T0

T1

T0

T1

T4

T2

TxT2

T4

RD

R4

R2

TxR2

R4

BK-BR

BK

T5

RcvT2

T5

14

BR-BK

YL

R5

RcvR2

R5

40

BK-SL

GN

15

SL-BK

41
16

NOTE 1

T6

T3

TxT3

T6

RD

R6

R3

TxR3

R6

YL-BL

BK

T7

RcvT3

T7

BL-YL

YL

R7

RcvR3

R7

T0

T1

T2

T3

T0

T1

T2

T3

Continued on next page

168

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN

RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE

CO

LDT

2-W
E&M

4-W
E&M

DID

SLT

8COT 4COT 4LDT 2LDT 2ODT 4ODT 2ODT 4ODT 4DIT 2DIT 8LC 4LC LLC
42

YL-OR

GN

T0

T0

T0

T0

T0

T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0

17

OR-YL

RD

R0

R0

R0

R0

R0

R0 TxR0 TxR0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0

43

YL-GN

BK

T1

T1

T1

T1

RcvT0 RcvT0 T1

18

GN-YL

YL

R1

R1

R1

R1

RcvR0 RcvR0 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1

44

YL-BR

GN

T2

T2

T2

T2

T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2

T2

19

BR-YL

RD

R2

R2

R2

R2

R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2

R2 R2 R2

45

YL-SL

BK

T3

T3

T3

RcvT1 RcvT1 T3

T3

20

SL-YL

YL

R3

R3

R3

RcvR1 RcvR1 R3

R3 R3 R3

46

VI-BL

GN

21

BL-VI

47

T0

T1

T0

T1

T4

T2

TxT2

T4

RD

R4

R2

TxR2

R4

VI-OR

BK

T5

RcvT2

T5

22

OR-VI

YL

R5

RcvR2

R5

48

VI-GN

GN

23

GN-VI

49

NOTE 2

T6

T3

TxT3

T6

RD

R6

R3

TxR3

R6

VI-BR

BK

T7

RcvT3

T7

24

BR-VI

YL

R7

RcvR3

R7

50

VI-SL

MN*

25

SL-VI

MJ*

T0

T1

T2

T3

T0

T1

T2

T3

Continued on next page

PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor alarm.

169

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION
PIN
CABLE CABLE

2wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON

SLOTS

EXT.
EXT.
KEY/ PAGE/
EXT.
MOH/
RELAY BGM

Digital
TRK
NOTE 3

8DLC

4DLC

2DLC

DK00

4COT

DTI

26

WH-BL

GN

T0

T0

T0

K1

RA

BL-WH

RD

R0

R0

R0

K0

RB

27

WH-OR

BK

T1

T1

T1

K3

TA

OR-WH

YL

R1

R1

R1

K2

TB

28

WH-GN

GN

T2

T2

K5

GN-WH

RD

R2

R2

K4

29

WH-BR

BK

T3

T3

K7

BR-WH

YL

R3

R3

K6

30

WH-SL

GN

SL-WH

RD

R4

31

RD-BL

BK

T5

BL-RD

YL

32

RD-OR

GN

OR-RD

RD

R6

33

RD-GN

BK

T7

GN-RD

YL

R7

NOTE 1

T4

R5
T6

Continued on next page

170

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION
PIN
CABLE CABLE

2wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON

SLOTS

EXT.
EXT.
Digital
KEY/ PAGE/
TRK
EXT.
MOH/
NOTE 3
RELAY BGM

8DLC

4DLC

2DLC

DK00

4COT

DTI

34

RD-BR

GN

T0

T0

T0

K1

RA

BR-RD

RD

R0

R0

R0

K0

RB

35

RD-SL

BK

T1

T1

T1

K3

TA

10

SL-RD

YL

R1

R1

R1

K2

TB

36

BK-BL

GN

T2

T2

K5

11

BL-BK

RD

R2

R2

K4

37

BK-OR

BK

T3

T3

K7

12

OR-BK

YL

R3

R3

K6

38

BK-GN

GN

13

GN-BK

RD

R4

39

BK-BR

BK

T5

14

BR-BK

YL

40

BK-SL

GN

15

SL-BK

RD

R6

41

YL-BL

BK

T7

16

BL-YL

YL

R7

T4

NOTE 1

R5
T6

Continued on next page

171

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION
PIN
CABLE CABLE

2wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON

SLOTS

EXT.
EXT.
Digital
KEY/ PAGE/
TRK
EXT.
MOH/
NOTE 3
RELAY BGM

8DLC

4DLC

2DLC

DK00

4COT

DTI

42

YL-OR

GN

T0

T0

T0

K1

RA

17

OR-YL

RD

R0

R0

R0

K0

RB

43

YL-GN

BK

T1

T1

T1

K3

TA

18

GN-YL

YL

R1

R1

R1

K2

TB

44

YL-BR

GN

T2

T2

K5

19

BR-YL

RD

R2

R2

K4

45

YL-SL

BK

T3

T3

K7

20

SL-YL

YL

R3

R3

K6

46

VI-BL

GN

21

BL-VI

RD

R4

47

VI-OR

BK

T5

22

OR-VI

YL

48

VI-GN

GN

23

GN-VI

RD

R6

49

VI-BR

BK

T7

24

BR-VI

YL

R7

50

VI-SL

MN*

25

SL-VI

MJ*

T4

NOTE 2

R5
T6

PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor alarm.

172

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT


Peripheral Equipment and Card List
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Analog C.O. Trunk
Tie Line Trunk
DID Trunk
Digital Trunk Interface
Optical Fiber Interface
POTS Splitter
In-Skin HUB
Single Line Telephone
Dterm/DSS Console
SN716 DESKCON
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON
Day/Night Mode Change by
External Key
External TAS Indicator
Paging Equipment
External Tone Source/
Announcement Machine
External BGM Source

CIRCUIT CARD
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-2LDT/PN-4LDT
PN-2ODT/PN-4ODT
PN-2DIT/PN-4DIT
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
PN-M10
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
PN-M13
PN-4LLCB/PN-8LCAA
PN-8ETIA/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PZ-M675
PN-4LC/PN-8LC
PN-4LLC
PN-2DLC
PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
PN-2DLC/PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
PN-DK00/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PN-DK00
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-DK00/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-TNTA
PN-DK00/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-TNTA

REFERENCE
Page
Page 175
Page 176
Page 185
Page 186
Page 193
Page 197
Page 201

Page 203
Page 205
Page 207
Page 237
Page 245
Page 246
Page 249

Page 252

Page 257
Continued on next page

173

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Peripheral Equipment and Card List


PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Power Failure Transfer
Alarm Display Panel
Built-in SMDR/MCI
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/
Hotel Printer

CIRCUIT CARD
PN-8PFTB
PN-8LC
PN-8COT
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D

174

REFERENCE
Page
Page 259

Page 264
Page 265
Page 269

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)

Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)


MDF Cross Connection for C.O. Trunk Card
PIM0
LTC0
PN-8COT

LEN000

(No. 0)

LEN001

(No. 1)

LT00

LEN006

(No. 6)

LEN007

(No. 7)

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

R6

T6

32

32

R7

T7

33

33

MDF

TO C.O. LINE

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001

LEN006
LEN007

LTC0 (P)

1
2

R0
R1

26
27

T0
T1

26
27

T0
T1

1
2

R0
R1

7
8

R6
R7

32
33

T6
T7

32
33

T6
T7

7
8

R6
R7

175

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)


LD Trunk (PN-2LDT/PN-4LDT)

MDF Cross Connection for LD Trunk Card


NOTE:

For PN-4LDT card, mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the 4LDT
card.
PIM0
LTC0
PN-4LDT

LEN000

(No. 0)

LEN001

(No. 1)

LEN002

(No. 2)

LEN003

(No. 3)

LT00

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

R2

T2

28

28

R3

T3

29

29

MDF

TO TIE LINE

TO TIE LINE

TO TIE LINE

TO TIE LINE

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003

1
2
3
4

R0
R1
R2
R3

26
27
28
29

LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3

26
27
28
29

176

T0
T1
T2
T3

1
2
3
4

R0
R1
R2
R3

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

4W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT)


When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the
PN-2ODT card.
NOTE:

Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN-2ODT
card.

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card


PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-2ODT
CN1
2
08

MDF

07
06
J

05
04 M1
03 E1

LEN001

(No. 1)

LEN000

(No. 0)

(M)

02 M0
01 E0

(E)
LTC0

LT00

LEN000

LEN001

(No. 0)

(No. 1)

TxR0

(Tx Ring)

TxT0

26

26

(Tx Tip)

RcvR0

(Rcv Ring)

RcvT0

27

27

(Rcv Tip)

TxR1

TxT1

28

28

RcvR1

RcvT1

29

29

TO TIE LINE

Continued on next page

177

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card


1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001

1 TxR0 26 TxT0
2 RcvR0 27 RcvT0
3 TxR1 28 TxT1
4 RcvR1 29 RcvT1

2 CN1 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (P)
26 TxT0
27 RcvT0
28 TxT1
29 RcvT1

CN1

1 TxR0
2 RcvR0
3 TxR1
4 RcvR1

LEN001
LEN000

178

M1
E1
M0
E0

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

2W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT)


When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the
PN-2ODT card.
NOTE:

Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN-2ODT
card.

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card


PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-2ODT
CN1
2
08

MDF

07
06
J

05
04

M1

03

E1

02

M0

01

E0

LEN001

(No. 1)

LEN000

(No. 0)

(M)
(E)
LTC0

LT00

LEN000

LEN001

(No. 0)

(No. 1)

R0

(Ring)

T0

26

26

(Tip)

R2

T2

28

28

TO TIE LINE

Continued on next page

179

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card


2 CN1 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)

1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001

1
2
3
4

R0
R2

26
27
28
29

LTC0 (P)
T0
T2

26
27
28
29

T0
T2

1
2
3
4

CN1

R0
R2

LEN001
LEN000

180

M1
E1
M0
E0

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

4W E&M Trunk (PN-4ODT)


When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT00 to LT07 slots, connect speech line circuits 0 to 3 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect circuits 0 to 3 for E and M to the CN2 and CN3 connectors on the front side of the card.
NOTE 1: When connecting the speech line circuits or E and M, make the installation cable by using the
connector attached with the PN-4ODTA card.
NOTE 2: When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT08 to LT11 slots, connect speech line circuits
0 and 1 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect speech line circuit 2 and 3 to the CN1 connector on the front side of the card.

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card


PIM0

INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-4ODT
CN3
08 M7
07
06 E7
05
04 M6
03

02 E6
01
CN2
08 M5
07
06 E5
05

LT00

04 M4
03
02 E4
01
CN1
08 M3
07 E3
06 M2
05 E2
04 M1
03 E1
02 M0
01 E0

MDF

LEN003
(No.3)
(M1)
(E1)

LEN002
(No.2)

(M0)
(E0)

LEN001
(No.1)
LEN000
(No.0)
LEN000
(No.0)
LEN001
(No.1)

LEN003
(No.3)
LEN002
(No.2)

LEN002
(No.2)
LEN003
(No.3)

TxR0
TxT0

J
1
26

LTC0
P
1
26

(TxRing)
(TxTip)

RcvR0
RcvT0

2
27

2
27

(Rcv Ring)
(Rcv Tip)

TxR1
TxT1

3
28

3
28

(TxRing)
(TxTip)

RcvR1
RcvT1

4
29

4
29

(Rcv Ring)
(Rcv Tip)

TxR2
TxT2

5
30

5
30

RcvR2
RcvT2

6
31

6
31

TxR3
TxT3

7
32

7
32

RcvR3
RcvT3

8
33

8
33

TO TIE LINE

Continued on next page

181

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card


1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001

1 TxR0 26 TxT0
2 RcvR0 27 RcvT0
3 TxR1 28 TxT1
4 RcvR1 29 RcvT1

2 CN2 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (P)
26 TxT0
27 RcvT0
28 TxT1
29 RcvT1

1 TxR0
2 RcvR0
3 TxR1
4 RcvR1

CN2
M1
LEN001

E1
M0

LEN000

182

E0

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

2W E&M Trunk (PN-4ODT)


When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT00 to LT07 slots, connect speech line circuits 0 to 3 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect circuits 0 to 3 for E and M to the CN2 and CN3 connectors on the front side of the card.
NOTE 1: When connecting the speech line circuits or E and M, make the installation cable by using the
connector attached with the PN-4ODTA card.
NOTE 2: When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT08 to LT11 slots, connect speech line circuits
0 and 1 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect speech line circuit 2 and 3 to the CN1 connector on the front side of the card.

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card


INSTALLATION CABLE

PIM0

PN-4ODT
CN3
08 M7
07
06 E7
05
04 M6
03

02 E6
01
CN2
08 M5
07
06 E5
05

LT00

04 M4
03
02 E4
01
CN1
08 M3
07 E3
06 M2
05 E2
04 M1
03 E1
02 M0
01 E0

MDF

LEN003
(No.3)
(M1)
(E1)

LEN002
(No.2)

(M0)
(E0)

LEN001
(No.1)
LEN000
(No.0)

R0
T0

J
1
26

LTC0
P
1
26

(Ring)
(Tip)
TO TIE LINE

LEN000
(No.0)
LEN001
(No.1)

LEN003
(No.3)
LEN002
(No.2)

LEN002
(No.2)
LEN003
(No.3)

R1
T1

3
28

3
28

R2
T2

5
30

5
30

R3
T3

7
32

7
32

Continued on next page

183

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card


2 CN2 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)

1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001

1
2
3
4

R0
R2

26
27
28
29

LTC0 (P)
T0
T2

26
27
28
29

T0
T2

1
2
3
4

CN2

R0

M1
R2

LEN001

E1
M0

LEN000

184

E0

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

DID Trunk (DIT)

DID Trunk (DIT)


DID Trunk (PN-4DIT/PN-2DIT)

MDF Cross Connection for DID Trunk Card


PIM0
LTC0
J

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

R2

T2

28

28

R3

T3

29

29

PN-4DIT

LEN000

(No. 0)

LEN001

(No. 1)

LEN002

(No. 2)

LEN003

(No. 3)

LT00

MDF

TO DID LINE

TO DID LINE

TO DID LINE

TO DID LINE

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003

1
2
3
4

R0
R1
R2
R3

26
27
28
29

LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3

185

26
27
28
29

T0
T1
T2
T3

1
2
3
4

R0
R1
R2
R3

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)


DTI for using a twisted pair cable (PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB)
When using a twisted-pair cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the MDF as shown below.

DTI Cable Connection via MDF


BWB

PBX

MDF
DTI

CSU

TWISTED-PAIR
CABLE
(SHIELD TYPE)

LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR

MAXIMUM 200 m (655 ft.) ...... 24DTI


MAXIMUM 400 m (1310 ft.) .... 30DTI
DTI:PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB

186

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

MDF Cross Connection for DTI Card


PIM0
LTC1
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB

MDF

RECEIVE
AP05
RA

17

17

RA

RB

42

42

RB

TA

18

18

TA

TB

43

43

TB

TO CSU

TRANSFER

LTC1 (J)

LTC1 (P)

17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

RA

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

44

44

19

20

45

45

20

187

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

DTI for using a coaxial cable (PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M542/PZ-M557)


When using an coaxial cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557) card
as shown below.

DTI Cable Connection via CONN Card


BWB

PBX
PN30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB

CSU
COAXIAL CABLE

CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)
LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR

MAXIMUM 6 dB loss at 1024 kHz

188

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

Coaxial Cable Connection for DTI Card


PIM0
PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB

LTC1 PZ-M542/PZ-M557
P

RECEIVE

AP05
RA

17

17

RB

42

42

TA

18

18

TB

43

43

RCV
TO CSU
TRS
SEND

1 LTC1 CONNECTOR

2 COAXIAL CONNECTOR

LTC1 (J)

LTC1 (P)

17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

RA

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

44

44

19

20

45

45

20

189

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

Mounting of CONN Card (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)


STEP1: When using LTC0 or LTC2 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, take off the
PLATE from the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card. Then, overturn the PLATE and secure it to the card
with screws.
When using LTC1 or LTC3 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, skip STEP1.
NOTE: The PLATE and screws are attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.

Connection of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 and PLATE


PLATE

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

SCREW

190

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

STEP2: Connect the LT connector on the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the LTC connector on BWB in
PIM.
NOTE: Two PZ-M542/PZ-M557 cards cannot be mounted on the adjoining LTC connectors. LTC0 and
LTC2, or LTC0 and LTC3, or LTC1 and LTC3 are mountable.

Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card

PIM
LTC CONNECTOR

LTC

LTC

LTC

0
LTC

When connecting to LTC1 or LTC3

When connecting to LTC0 or LTC2


LTC CONNECTOR

LT CONNECTOR

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

191

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

STEP3: Secure the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER with one screw.
NOTE 1: Screw is attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.
NOTE 2: Before securing the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER, all the cards should
be mounted on the card slots and the PIM CARD STOPPER should be secured with screws. See
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS.
Page 275

Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

CARD STOPPER

SCREW

192

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

Optical Fiber Interface (M10)


(1)

Connection Outline
The optical fiber interface card (PN-M10) is available for DTI to DTI connection between the NEAX
2000 IPS/Retrofit system.
When you use an optical fiber to connect between the 24-channel T1 or 30-channel E1 Digital Trunk
Interface (DTI) card, connect the fiber each other to the CN1 connector of the M10 cards in both
sites. Two 24DTI cards or two 30DTI cards are connected to one M10 card, via MDF through LTC
connector on the BWB.

Outline of Optical Fiber Connection

PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB

OFFICE A

OFFICE B

MDF

MDF

OPTICAL
FIBER

M10

SEND

PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB

CN1

M10

PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB

SEND

RECEIVE

RECEIVE

CN1

PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB

MAXIMUM 10 km
(6.25 miles)

NOTE 1: The PN-M10 card must be directly connected to the PN-M10 card in opposite office.
NOTE 2: Connect two optical fibers which are used for receive and send signals to CN1 connector of the
M10 card. The upside of CN1 connector is used for sending and the downside is used for receiving.

193

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

(2)

Fiber Requirement
Size of fiber
: Any size of Single Mode fiber
Kind of fiber optic connector : SC connector
Maximum distance
: 10 km (6.25 mile)

(3)

System Capacity for DTI to DTI connection


M10 card : Maximum 4 (One M10 card per two 24DTI or two 30DTC)
24DTI card : Maximum 8
30DTI card : Maximum 8

194

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

(4)

MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for Optical Fiber Interface


PIM0
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB

LTC3
P

MDF

RECEIVE
AP09

RA

RA

RB

26

26

RB

TA

TA

TB

27

27

TB
1

PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB

SEND

LTC3
J

RECEIVE
AP10

RA

RA

RB

34

34

RB

TA

10

10

TA

TB

35

35

TB
2

SEND

LTC1
PN-M10

No. 1

RECEIVE

RA

19

19

RA

RB

44

44

RB

TA

20

20

TA

TB

45

45

TB
SEND

LT05
RA
CN1

No. 0

17

17

RECEIVE
RA

RB

42

42

RB

TA

18

18

TA

TB

43

43

TB
3

SEND
RECEIVE

SEND

To upside of CN1 connector of PN-M10 card in opposite office


To downside of CN1 connector of PN-M10 card in opposite office

Continued on next page

195

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

MDF Cross Connection for Optical Fiber Interface


1 LTC3 CONNECTOR

RA

26

RB

26

RB

RA

TA

27

TB

27

TB

TA

28

28

29

29

LTC (J)

(P)

2 LTC3 CONNECTOR

RA

34

RB

34

RB

RA

10

TA

35

TB

35

TB

10

TA

11

36

36

11

12

37

37

12

LTC (J)

(P)

3 LTC1 CONNECTOR

17

RA

42

RB

42

RB

17

RA

18

TA

43

TB

43

TB

18

TA

19

RA

44

RB

44

RB

19

RA

20

TA

45

TB

45

TB

20

TA

LTC (J)

(P)

196

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

POTS Splitter (M13)

POTS Splitter (M13)


(1)

Connection Outline
The POTS Splitter*1 card (PN-M13) is used to accommodate HomePNA*2/VDSL*3 modem. PN-M13
has 24-line built-in POTS Splitters and accommodates a maximum of 24-line HomePNA/VDSL
modems per card.
*1 POTS Splitter:
Plain Old Telephone Service Splitter. A device that rejects the Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) signal and allows the POTS frequencies to pass through.
*2 HomePNA:
Home Phoneline Networking Alliance. An association of companies working toward the adoption
of a single, unified phone line networking standard and bringing to market a range of interoperable
home networking solutions using in-place phone wiring.
*3 VDSL:
Very-high-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line. A technology, which accomplishes very high-speed
communications using Twisted Pair cable.
The following illustration shows the outline of POTS splitter connection.

Outline of POTS Splitter Connection


PBX

MDF

PN-4LLCB/
PN-8LCAA

HomePNA/
VDSL
Adapter
PC
NOTE

PNM13

POTS
Splitter
TEL

SPL CABLE-A
HomePNA/
VDSL
Modem

Internet

NOTE:

Router

HUB

Length of connection cable depends on the specifications of HomePNA/VDSL Adapter/Modem.

197

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

POTS Splitter (M13)

(2)

MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for POTS Splitter


NOTE:

Mount the PN-M13 card in LT00-LT11 slot.


PIM0
LTC0
J

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

R2

T2

28

28

PN-4LLC

LEN000 (No. 0)

LEN001 (No. 1)

MDF

LT00
LEN002 (No. 2)

LEN003 (No. 3)

R3

T3

29

29
INSTALLATION CABLE

SPL CABLE-A

PN-M13

LC

HomePNA/
VDSL
Adapter

A
PC
B

POTS Splitter
POTS Splitter

TEL
A

TO SINGLE
LINE TELEPHONE

2
HomePNA/
VDSL
Modem

HUB

Router

TO
INTERNET

SPL CABLE-A

Continued on next page

198

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

POTS Splitter (M13)

MDF Cross Connection for POTS Splitter


CIRCUIT
NO.

CHAMP CONNECTOR
FOR LINE CIRCUIT

CHAMP CONNECTOR FOR


TELEPHONE/xDSL
TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT
2

26

TI00

01

RI00

01

TO00

26

RO00

27

TI01

02

RI01

02

TO01

27

RO01

28

TI02

03

RI02

03

TO02

28

RO02

29

TI03

04

RI03

04

TO03

29

RO03

30

TI04

05

RI04

05

TO04

30

RO04

31

TI05

06

RI05

06

TO05

31

RO05

32

TI06

07

RI06

07

TO06

32

RO06

33

TI07

08

RI07

08

TO07

33

RO07

34

TI08

09

RI08

09

TO08

34

RO08

35

TI09

10

RI09

10

TO09

35

RO09

10

36

TI10

11

RI10

11

TO10

36

RO10

11

37

TI11

12

RI11

12

TO11

37

RO11

12

38

TI12

13

RI12

13

TO12

38

RO12

13

39

TI13

14

RI13

14

TO13

39

RO13

14

40

TI14

15

RI14

15

TO14

40

RO14

15

41

TI15

16

RI15

16

TO15

41

RO15

16

42

TI16

17

RI16

17

TO16

42

RO16

17

43

TI17

18

RI17

18

TO17

43

RO17

18

44

TI18

19

RI18

19

TO18

44

RO18

19

45

TI19

20

RI19

20

TO19

45

RO19

20

46

TI20

21

RI20

21

TO20

46

RO20

21

47

TI21

22

RI21

22

TO21

47

RO21

22

48

TI22

23

RI22

23

TO22

48

RO22

23

49

TI23

24

RI23

24

TO23

49

RO23

199

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

POTS Splitter (M13)

SPL CABLE-A
Connector A (24-pin)

Champ Connector (48-pin)

To LC/TEL
Connector A
of M13 Card
Connector B (24-pin)

To Champ
Connector

To LC/TEL
Connector B
of M13 Card

0.55 m (1.8 ft)

200

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

In-Skin HUB

In-Skin HUB
(1)

Connection Outline
The In-Skin HUB card (PN-8ETIA) is used to accommodate switching HUB. PN-8ETIA card has 8ports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Auto-negotiation fixed).
PZ-M675 card is mounted on PN-8ETIA card. PZ-M675 card is used to accommodate all 10BASET/100BASE-TX ports on a PN-8ETIA card with Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Outline of Switching HUB Connection


PN-8ETIA card
PZ-M675 card

BWB

RJ45 Connector
LAN 7/8
LAN 5/6
LAN 3/4
LAN 1/2

PBX

MP
card

To IP TERMINAL

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Cable

MAXIMUM 100 m (327.5 ft.)

The number of IP terminal that can be connected to the In-Skin HUB is as follows.

Number of IP Terminal
IP Terminal

Inaset

DtermIP

ITR-LC-1
ITR-240G-1
ITR-320C-1
ITR-8D-2
ITR-8D-3
ITR-16D-2
ITR-16D-3
ITR-16LD-3
ITR-32D-3
ITR-4D-1

No. of IP Terminal (MAXIMUM)


2000 IPS
IPSDM

5
7
5
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

REMARKS

2
5
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

201

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

In-Skin HUB

(2)

LAN Interface
PN-8ETIA card has 8-ports RJ45 type connector. Each connector has LINK/ACT LED and 10/
100(SPD) LED.

LAN Interface connectors


LINK/ACT
10/100

87654321
12345678

10/100
LINK/ACT

RJ-45 Connector Pin Assignment


1

Data (MDI-X)

RD+

RD-

TD+

TD-

Signal pair PoE

DC Pos

DC Pos

DC Neg.

DC Neg.

NOTE 1: Cable connection should use the category 5 and UL standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable.
NOTE 2: Since other Switching HUB or MP card occupies 1Port of PN-8ETIA card, a terminal connectable to PN-8ETIA card is maximum 7.

202

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC)

Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC)


Standard Line (PN-8LC/PN-4LC)

MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Standard Line)


PIM0
LTC0
J

PN-8LC

MDF

ROSETTE
LEN000

(No. 0)

LEN001

(No. 1)

LT00

LEN006

(No. 6)

LEN007

(No. 7)

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

R6

T6

32

32

R7

T7

33

33

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001

LEN006
LEN007

1
2

7
8

R0
R1

R6
R7

26
27

32
33

TO SINGLE
LINE TELEPHONE

LTC0 (P)
T0
T1

T6
T7

26
27

32
33

203

T0
T1

T6
T7

1
2

7
8

R0
R1

R6
R7

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC)

Long Line (PN-4LLC)

MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Long Line)


NOTE:

For PN-4LLC card, mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the 4LLC
card.
PIM0
LTC0
PN-4LLC

LEN000 (No. 0)

LEN001 (No. 1)
LT00
LEN002 (No. 2)

LEN003 (No. 3)

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

R2

T2

28

28

R3

T3

29

29

MDF
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003

1
2
3
4

R0
R1
R2
R3

26
27
28
29

LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3

26
27
28
29

204

T0
T1
T2
T3

1
2
3
4

R0
R1
R2
R3

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)

Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)


Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)

MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Standard Line)


PIM0
LTC0
J

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

R6

T6

32

32

R7

T7

33

33

PN-8DLC

LEN000

(No. 0)

MDF

ROSETTE

TO Dterm /
DSS CONSOLE
Exi

LL

LT00

LEN006

(No. 6)

LEN007

(No. 7)

OP
OP
ER
ER
Tra
nsf
er

Fea
ture

66

MN
MN
OO

Re

99

Co

Re

dia

...

...

...

...

cal

WX
WX
YZ
YZ

##

An
sw
er

Hel

...

...

...

...

DE
DEF
F

88

TU
TU
VV

00

Ho
ld

...

...

...

...

AB
ABC
C

55
JK
JK

77

(No. 1)

N
E
C
...

...

...

...

44

GH
GH
II
PQ
PQ
RS
RS

LEN001

...

...

...

...

11

nf

Sp

ea

ker

MIC

MODULAR CONNECTOR

LTC0 (J)

LTC0 (P)

LEN000
LEN001

1
2

R0
R1

26
27

T0
T1

26
27

T0
T1

1
2

R0
R1

LEN006
LEN007

7
8

R6
R7

32
33

T6
T7

32
33

T6
T7

7
8

R6
R7

205

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)

Long Line (PN-4DLCT/PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)

MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Long Line)


PIM0
LTC0

PN-4DLCT/2DLCB/
PN-2DLCN
R0

MDF

ROSETTE

TO Dterm /
DSS CONSOLE

Exi

...

26

26

44

GH
GH
II

RS
RS

Tra

LT00
LEN002 (No. 2)

LEN003 (No. 3)

T1

27

27

R2

T2

28

28

R3

T3

29

29

1
2
3
4

R0
R1
R2
R3

29
28
27
26

Co

Re
An
sw
er
Sp
ea

dia

...

Hel

...

...

...

...

...

...

Fea
ture

...

Re
cal
l

nf

ker

MIC

MODULAR CONNECTOR

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003

66

MN
MN
OO

99

WX
WX
YZ
YZ

##

nsf
er

R1

DE
DEF
F

88

TU
TU
VV

00

OP
OP
ER
ER

Ho
ld

LEN001 (No. 1)

N
E
C
...

...

...

55

JK
JK
LL

...

...

...

AB
ABC
C

77
PQ
PQ

...

...

...

11

T0

...

...

LEN000 (No. 0)

LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3

206

26
27
28
29

T0
T1
T2
T3

1
2
3
4

R0
R1
R2
R3

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)


(1)

MDF Cross Connection


(a) PN-PW00 Power Option

MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option)


NOTE:

When using PN-PW00 card, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with
the PN-PW00 card.
INSTALLATION CABLE
TO SN716 DESKCON
MDF

PIM0

NOTE

R0

T0

26

26

PN-8DLC/4DLC

LEN000 (No. 0)

LTC0

ROSETTE
5

48 V

2
1

E
48 V

LT00

NOTE

MODULAR CONNECTOR

PN-PW00

08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01

48 V
E
48 V

LTC0 (J)
LEN000

R0

26

LTC0 (P)
T0

26

T0

R0

207

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(b) AC Adapter Power Option

MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (AC Adapter Power Option)
INSTALLATION CABLE

PIM0

LTC0

MDF

ROSETTE

E
PN-8DLC/4DLC

LEN000

(No. 0)

R0

T0

26

26

TO SN716 DESKCON

2
1

LT00
MODULAR CONNECTOR

24 V AC ADAPTER
TO COMMERCIAL
AC OUTLET

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
-27V

LTC0 (J)
LEN000

R0

26

LTC0 (P)
T0

26

T0

R0

208

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(2)

Mounting of Handset
(a) When mounting at the left side of the SN716 DESKCON (Standard)

STEP1: Let the handset cord through the hole on the side of the handset support fitting as shown below.

CAUTION
Handle the cord with care not to snap a hook on the modular of the cord, when you let the cord
through the hole.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

(01)

(02)

(03)

LDN
(13)

TIE
(14)

Busy
(15)

ATND
(16)

NANS
(17)

Recall
(18)

EMG

BV

TRKSL

Call Park

SC

SVC

(04)

PAGE

REC

Start

Mute

Night

(21)

Position Busy

Cancel
L6 (12)

Volume

(24)
1

L4 (10)

L3 (09)

L5 (11)

DEST

SRC

(19)

Talk
(22)

(20)

Release

Hold

Answer

(26)

(23)

(25)

L2 (08)
L1 (07)

HANDSET CORD

(DESK CONSOLE SIDE)

(HANDSET SIDE)

Continued on next page

209

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

<TOP VIEW>

<BOTTOM VIEW>

HOLE
<SIDE VIEW>

Continued on next page

210

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

STEP2: Plug the modular into HAND H/S0 jack, and trail the cord along the groove at the bottom of the
console (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

HANDSET CORD

HAND
H/S0 (for Handset/Headset)
H/S1 (for Headset only)

Continued on next page

211

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(b) When mounting at the right side of the SN716 DESKCON

Mounting of Handset to SN716 DESKCON


STEP1: Remove the metal plate from the Handset, turn it over, and mount it to the Handset again.
Turn over the metal plate.

When mounting at the right side


Screw (1)

When mounting at the left side


Screw (2)

Screw (5)

Handset
Handset
Screw (4)

Screw (3)

Screw (3)

Screw (4)

Metal Plate

Screw (2)

Screw (5)

Screw (1)

Metal Plate

Desk Console

STEP2: Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.
Handset code

(Handset side)

(DESK CONSOLE side)

Hole
<SIDE VIEW>

Continued on next page

212

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

STEP3: Fit the three small holes of the handset support fitting to the projections on the bottom of the
console, and fix the fitting by three screws.

CAUTION
Do not screw too firmly to avoid damage to the console.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON


HANDSET CORD

PROJECTION

PROJECTION

HANDSET SUPPORT

213

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE)

<BOTTOM VIEW>

<TOP VIEW>

STEP4: Plug the modular into HAND H/S0 jack (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Code
HAND
H/S0 (for Handset/Headset)
H/S1 (for Headset only)

Continued on next page

214

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

STEP5: Fit the three small holes of the handset support fitting to the projections on the bottom of the
console, and fix the fitting by three screws.

CAUTION
Do not screw too firmly to avoid damage to the console.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

Projection

Handset Support

Projection

215

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(3)

Mounting of Headset
Plug the headset into the modular jack (H/S0 or H/S1) located at the bottom of the console, if
required.

Headset Installation for SN716 DESKCON


Head Band

Slide
Slide

Capsule Unit
(Microphone and
Speaker)
Ear Pad

Slide

Closing
Clip

Voice Tube

Quick Disconnect

PIN1

Modular Plug NOTE

PIN1 TX (+)
2 RX
3 RX
4 TX ()

HAND
H/S0
H/S1

NOTE:

In daily use, use Quick Disconnect when connecting/disconnecting the Headset.

216

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(4)

Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON


Plug the line cord into the modular jack (LINE) located at the bottom of the console. For the MDF
cross connection for the SN716 DESKCON. Refer to MDF Cross Connection for SN716
DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option).
Page 207

Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON

LINE CORD (6-core)

PAGE REC LINE

(8-core)
(6-core)
(8-core)

3P

PBX

MDF

MODULAR
TERMINAL
3P

1P
8DLC/
4DLC

SN716 DESKCON

2P
PW00

217

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(5)

Connection of AC-DC Adapter


When using an AC-DC ADAPTER for power supply, plug the AC-DC ADAPTER into the 12-24
V DC terminal located at the rear of the console.

AC-DC ADAPTER Connection to SN716 DESKCON

12~24 V DC

RS-232

AC-DC ADAPTER

218

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(6)

Connection of Recording Equipment


The following equipment is required for using recording function:
Tape Recorder with MIC and Remote Connections
Cross Connect Wire
8-Core Modular Block (RJ45)
8-Core Modular Cable
As shown in the following figure, connect cross connect wire to MIC Jack and Remote Jack, then
connect other end of wire to 8-core modular block. And connect one end of 8-core modular cable to
DESKCON REC connector, connect the other end to 8-core block.

Cable Connection for Recording Equipment


8-Core
ModularCable

MODULAR
BLOCK(RJ45)

TAPERECORDER
1P
MICJACK
1P
REMOTE
JACK

CrossConnectWire

REC(8-Core)

DESKCONSOLE
(Bottomview)
MODULAR
BLOCK(RJ45)

SN716DESKCON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TAPERECORDER
MICJack

RemoteJack

8-core
Modular
Cable

Cross
Connect
Wire

Page 220

219

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

8-CORE LINE CABLE (INSTALLATION CABLE)


NOTE

8-pin Modular Connector


8-pin Modular Connector

(Rosette side)

(DESK CONSOLE side)


8-core Line Cable (Installation Cable)

Pin No.

12345678

NOTE:

Pin No.

LEAD NAME

MEANING

Speech

Speech

Not used

Not used

KA

Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)

KB

Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)

Not used

Not used

Cut the cable in proper length. Attach the modular connector to both sides of the 8-core
line cable using installation tool.

220

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(7)

Configuration Menu
Configuration Menu is used to assign configuration data for the SN716 DESKCON. The menu has
the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

NOTE:

HEADSET/HANDSET
HEADSET TYPE
MUTE
REC CONTROL
PAGE CONTROL
SUP CONNECTION NOTE
REC VOLUME NOTE
BLF NOTE
HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP
2ND RINGING
RINGING
RECEIVER VOL SET
FUNCTION KEY SWAP NOTE
RINGER VOLUME IN PB NOTE
POWER CONTROL
CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS
This item can not be used for the NEAX 2000 IPS.

(a) Displaying Configuration Menu


Press the L4, L5 and SRC key simultaneously and turn on the power (Plug the AC/DC adapter
of the SN716 DESKCON in AC outlet).

Displaying the Configuration Menu

Position
Busy

Night

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

SC

SVC

Start

Mute

Position
Alarm Available
LDN

TIE

EMG

BV

Busy

ATND

TRKSL Call Park

Position Busy lamp


Night

Position Busy

SRC key
Cancel

L6

L5 key
L4 key

L4
L3

L2 key

2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

L5

L2

DEST

SRC
Talk

Release

Hold

Answer

L1

Continued on next page

221

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

The first page of Configuration Menu appears on the LCD. Configuration Menu has a total of five
or six pages.
1st Page
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET

DEST: next page

2: HEADSET TYPE

Release: exit

3: MUTE

Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: REC CONTROL

DEST: next page

2: PAGE CONTROL

Release: exit

3: SUP CONNECTION

Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME

DEST: next page

2: BLF

Release: exit

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP

Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING

DEST: next page

2: RINGING

Release: exit

3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET

Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P5] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: FUNCTION KEY SWAP

DEST: next page

2: RINGER VOLUME IN PB

Release: exit

3: POWER CONTROL

Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P6] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS

DEST: next page

2nd Page

3rd Page

4th Page

5th Page

6th Page

Release: exit
Answer: update

222

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

STEP1: When pressing the DEST key, the display changes to the next page. When returning to the previous page, press the SRC key.
STEP2: When pressing the Release key, Configuration Menu disappears and the SN716 DESKCON returns to normal operation.
(b) Selection of Configuration Item
By using a numeric key, press the desired number in Configuration Menu. A menu for assigning
configuration data appears. Assign configuration data referring to Assignment of Configuration
Data on the next page.

Selecting a Configuration Item

Position
Alarm Available
LDN

TIE

EMG

BV

Position
Night
Busy
Busy

ATND

NANS

TRKSL Call Park SC

Night

Recall

PAGE

REC

SVC

Start

Mute Position Busy

SRC key
Cancel

L6
1
L5
L4
L3

2
ABC

3
DEF

SRC

DEST
Talk

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

TUV

9
WXYZ

L2

Release

Hold

Answer

DEST key

Answer key

L1

Numeric keys

Release key

223

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(c) Assignment of Configuration Data


This section explains how to assign each configuration data. When assigning configuration data,
the following shaded keys are used.

Assigning Configuration Data

Position
Alarm Available
LDN

TIE

EMG

BV

Busy

ATND

TRKSL Call Park

Position
Busy

Night

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

SC

SVC

Start

Mute

Night

Position Busy

SRC key
Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

L4

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

L3

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

L5

L2

SRC

DEST
Talk

DEST key
Release

Hold

Answer

L1

Numeric keys

224

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(d) Updating Configuration Data


After assigning the configuration data, take the next step as below:
- To update the configuration data
While one of configuration menus is displayed on the LCD, press Answer key. (DESK CONSOLE
is automatically restarted.)
- To cancel update
Press Release key.

Updating Configuration Data

Position
Alarm Available
LDN

TIE

EMG

BV

Busy

ATND

TRKSL Call Park

Position
Busy

Night

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

SC

SVC

Start

Mute Position Busy

Cancel

L6
1
L5
L4
L3

Night

2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

L2

SRC

DEST
Talk

Release

Hold

Answer

Answer key (Update)

L1

Release key (Cancel)

225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(e) Configuration Data Assignment of Each Item


<Headset/Handset>
This item specifies an optional handset/headset connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.
NOTE:

When using HAND H/S1 connector, this data assignment is not required.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P1.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET

DEST: next page

2: HEADSET TYPE

Release: exit

3: MUTE

Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (HEADSET/HANDSET).


STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[HEADSET/HANDSET]

SRC: menu

* 1: HEADSET
2: HANDSET

Default setting:
1:HEADSET

1.

Headset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.

2.

Handset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET

DEST: next page

2: HEADSET TYPE

Release: exit

3: MUTE

Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.

226

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Headset Type>
This item specifies the type of headset connected to the HAND H/S1 or H/S0 connector.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P1.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET

DEST: next page

2: HEADSET TYPE

Release: exit

3: MUTE

Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 2 (HEADSET TYPE).


STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[HEADSET TYPE]

SRC: menu

* 1: SUPRA NEW SIGMA

Default setting:

2: SUPRA POLARIS Series

1:SUPRA NEW
SIGMA

3: GN2200 Series
1.

The type of Headset is SUPRA F53U-U03F.

2.

The type of Headset is P51N-U10P SUPRA NC POLARIS or others.

3.

The type of Headset is GN2200 .

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET

DEST: next page

2: HEADSET TYPE

Release: exit

3: MUTE

Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.

227

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Mute>
This item specifies On/Off setting of the mute function for the HAND H/S0 or H/S1 connector.
If the Mute key is pressed while the mute function is set to On, the voice at the DESKCON side
is not sent to the other party.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P1.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET

DEST: next page

2: HEADSET TYPE

Release: exit

3: MUTE

Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (MUTE).


STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[MUTE]

SRC: menu

* 1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON


2: H/S0 ON, H/S1OFF

Default setting:
1:H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON

3: H/S0 OFF, H/S1 ON


1.

Both H/S0 and H/S1 are set to On

2.

Only H/S0 is set to On

3.

Only H/S1 is set to On

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET

DEST: next page

2: HEADSET TYPE

Release: exit

3: MUTE

Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.

228

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<REC Control>
This item specifies the operation mode of a recording equipment. The following two types of
modes are available:
Manual mode:
Manual mode is available when the recording equipment has a remote connection function.
When the REC key is pressed, the system starts recording. When the REC key is pressed again,
the recording stops.
Automatic mode:
In automatic mode, the system starts/ends recording automatically when a call is connected/
disconnected. Note that the REC key is not effective in Automatic mode.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P2.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x


1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL
3: SUP CONNECTION

SRC: prev page


DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (REC CONTROL).


STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[REC CONTROL]
* 1: MANUAL
2: AUTO

1.

Manual mode

2.

Automatic mode

SRC: menu
Default setting:
1:MANUAL

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x
1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL
3: SUP CONNECTION

SRC: prev page


DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

229

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<REC Volume>
This item specifies the recording level of the received voice from the other party. Note that the
voice level at the operator side cannot be adjusted.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P3.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME

DEST: next page

2: BLF

Release: exit

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update


STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (REC VOLUME).
STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT] SRC: menu
1: +2dB

4:-8dB
Default setting: 2:0dB

* 2: 0dB
3: -4dB
1.

+2dB Up

2.

0dB (Standard level)

3.

-4dB Down

4.

-8dB Down

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME

DEST: next page

2: BLF

Release: exit

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update


STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.
230

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Hold/Start/Release Swap>
This item specifies the locations of Hold, Start, and Release key.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P3.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME

DEST: next page

2: BLF

Release: exit

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update


STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP).
STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP] SRC: menu
* 1: ORIGINAL
2: SWAPPED

1.

Original setting

2.

Swapped setting NOTE

NOTE:

Default setting:
1:ORIGINAL

The locations of each key changes as shown below.

ORIGINAL SETTING

SWAPPED SETTING

Hold

Start

Start

Release

Release

Hold

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME

DEST: next page

2: BLF

Release: exit

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update


STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.
231

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<2nd Ringing>
This item specifies on/off setting of the 2nd ringing.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P4.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING

DEST: next page

2: RINGING

Release: exit

3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET

Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (2ND RINGING).


STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[2ND RINGING]

SRC: menu

* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE

1.

2nd Ringing is available.

2.

2nd Ringing is not available.

Default setting:
1:ENABLE

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING

DEST: next page

2: RINGING

Release: exit

3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET

Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

232

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Ringing>
This item specifies on/off setting of the ringing.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P4.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING

DEST: next page

2: RINGING

Release: exit

3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET

Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 2 (RINGING).


STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[RINGING]

SRC: menu

* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE

1.

Ringing is available.

2.

Ringing is not available.

Default setting:
1:ENABLE

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING

DEST: next page

2: RINGING

Release: exit

3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET

Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

233

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Receiver Volume Set>


This item specifies the receiver volume.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P4.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING

DEST: next page

2: RINGING

Release: exit

3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET

Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (RECEIVER VOLUME SET).


STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[RECEIVER VOLUME SET]

SRC: menu

* 1: SYSTEM DEFAULT

4: QUIET PLACE

2: DEFAULT BY CALL

Default setting:
1:SYSTEM DEFAULT

3: SAME AS PREVIOUS CALL


1.

When specifying 1:SYSTEM DEFAULT, the receiver volume is set to the default level of the
DLC card.

2.

When specifying 2:DEFAULT BY CALL, the receiver volume is set to the level in accordance
with the system default.

3.

When specifying 3:SAME AS PREVIOUS CALL, the receiver volume is set to the level
adjusted by the UP/DOWN key.

4.

When specifying 4:QUIET PLACE, the receiver volume is set to the level (-8dB) lower than
System Default.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING

DEST: next page

2: RINGING

Release: exit

3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET

Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.
234

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Power Control>
This item specifies the power control of the SN716 DESKCON in night mode.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P5.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P5] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: FUNCTION KEY SWAP

DEST: next page

2: RINGER VOLUME IN PB

Release: exit

3: POWER CONTROL

Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (POWER CONTROL).


STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[POWER CONTROL]

SRC: menu

* 1: NORMAL
2: LOW POWER (PUT OUT LCD)

Default setting:
1:NORMAL

1.

Power control is not effective.

2.

The LCD back light is put out. When pressing an any key, the LCD back light is put on, the light
is put out again after 30 seconds.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P5] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: FUNCTION KEY SWAP

DEST: next page

2: RINGER VOLUME IN PB

Release: exit

3: POWER CONTROL

Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

235

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Conf. Tone For All Keys>


This item specifies the confirmation tone control for all keys of the SN716 DESKCON.
STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P6.

Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P6] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS

DEST: next page


Release: exit
Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS).
STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.
[CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS]

SRC: menu

* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE

Default setting:
1:ENABLE

3: SYSTEM
1.

Confirmation tone is enable for all keys.

2.

Confirmation tone is disable for all keys.

3.

Confirmation tone is controlled by the system.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P6] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS

DEST: next page


Release: exit
Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data.


When canceling update, press the Release key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

236

Page 225

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)


(1)

MDF Cross Connection


Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)

MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (Standard Line)


PIM0

LTC0

PN-8DLC

LEN000

(No. 0)

LEN001

(No. 1)

LT00

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

LEN006

(No. 6)

LEN007

(No. 7)

R6

T6

32

MDF

MODULAR CONNECTOR

32

T7

33

33

LTC0 (J)

LEN006
LEN007

1
2

7
8

TO SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

R7

LEN000
LEN001

ROSETTE

R0
R1

R6
R7

26
27

32
33

LTC0 (P)
T0
T1

T6
T7

237

26
27

32
33

T0
T1

T6
T7

1
2

7
8

R0
R1

R6
R7

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

Long Line (PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)

MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (Long Line)


PIM0
LTC0

LEN000 (No. 0)

LEN001 (No. 1)
LT00

MDF

R0

T0

26

26

R1

T1

27

27

28

28

29

29

PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN

1
2
3
4

R0
R1

TO SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

MODULAR CONNECTOR

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001

ROSETTE

26
27
28
29

LTC0 (P)
T0
T1

238

26
27
28
29

T0
T1

1
2
3
4

R0
R1

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

(2)

Handling
Precautions Required

Installation of SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

STEP1: To provide the console with the headset in place of the handset, unplug the modular cord from
the handset and then plug the modular cord to the Jack Set.

Jack Set Installation for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

SN708/709/712/741
ATTCON

MODULAR
CORD

JACK SET

239

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

STEP2: Set the switch located inside the console according to the type of headset/handset connected.
Refer to next page.
Page 241

Switch Setting on the SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON


Slide the directory out of the way.
Then insert a flat screw drivers blade into the notched opening and apply light upward pressure until
the access panel is clear of the front lip. At the same time apply pressure (toward you) at the rear of
the pedestal to move the access panel.

ACCESS PANEL

DIRECTORY

Continued on next page

240

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

Switch Setting on SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON


Set the switch according to the type of headset/handset connected.
C: Carbon Type Handset/Headset
S: SUPRA Headset
D: Dterm Type Handset
Replace the directory and access panel.

SWITCH
D

241

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

STEP3: Plug the line cord into the modular jack located at the bottom of the console.

Cable Connection to SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON


LINE CORD

MODULAR
TERMINAL
1P

PBX

MDF
1P

1P

DLC

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

242

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

STEP4: Screw the handset support onto the bottom of the console as shown below.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN708/709/712 ATTCON

HANDSET
SUPPORT

SN708/709/712 ATTCON

243

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

For SN741 ATTCON, use the modular cord clamp provided with the handset support to dispose the
straight part of the handset modular cord as shown below.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN741 ATTCON

MODULAR CORD CLAMP

SN741 ATTCON

HANDSET SUPPORT

MODULAR CORD

244

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)

Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)


MDF Cross Connection for Day/Night Mode Change by External Key
When using PN-DK00
PIM0
LTC0
MDF

K0

K0

K1

26

26

K1

K2

K2

K3

27

27

K3

K4

K4

K5

28

28

K5

K6

K6

K7

29

29

K7

PN-DK00

TO KEYS

LEN000

LT00

LEN002

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002

1
2
3
4

K0
K2
K4
K6

26
27
28
29

LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7

26
27
28
29

K1
K3
K5
K7

1
2
3
4

K0
K2
K4
K6

When using DK on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D


PBX
External Key

PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D

245

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

External TAS Indicator (DK)

External TAS Indicator (DK)


(1)

Connection Outline

External TAS Indicator Connection Outline


When using PN-DK00
PBX
MDF

PN-DK00

TAS Indicator with Battery


IND

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
G
G

PBX
PN-DK00

MDF

TAS Indicator with Battery


(Ground Start)
IND

246

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

External TAS Indicator (DK)

(2)

MDF Cross Connection


When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery

MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery


PIM0
LTC0
PN-DK00

LEN000

LT00

LEN002

K0

K1

26

26

K2

K3

27

27

K4

K5

28

28

K6

K7

29

29

TAS INDICATOR
WITH BATTERY

MDF
K0

IND

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
27 V
G

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002

1
2
3
4

K0
K2
K4
K6

26
27
28
29

LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7

247

26
27
28
29

K1
K3
K5
K7

1
2
3
4

K0
K2
K4
K6

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

External TAS Indicator (DK)

When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery (Ground Start)

MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery (Ground Start)
PIM0

TAS INDICATOR
WITH BATTERY
(GROUND START)

LTC0
PN-DK00

LEN000

LT00

LEN002

K0

K1

26

26

K2

K3

27

27

K4

K5

28

28

K6

K7

29

29

MDF
K0

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002

1
2
3
4

K0
K2
K4
K6

26
27
28
29

IND

LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7

248

26
27
28
29

K1
K3
K5
K7

1
2
3
4

K0
K2
K4
K6

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)


(1)

Requirement for Customer-owned Paging Equipment


Input Impedance
: 600
Control Method
: Start - Ground Start NOTE
Stop - Ground Off (Open)

NOTE:
(2)

The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125 A.

Connection Outline

Paging Equipment Connection Outline


When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00
PBX
For Amplifier Input
MDF

PN-8COT

Paging Equipment

PN-DK00

For Control

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

G
G

Continued on next page

249

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

Paging Equipment Connection Outline


When using PN-8COT and DK on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D
PBX
For Amplifier Input
MDF

PN-8COT

Paging Equipment

PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D
For Control

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

G
G

250

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

(3)

MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for Paging Equipment


PIM0
J

LTC0
P

K0

K1

26

26

K2

K3

27

27

K4

K5

28

28

K6

K7

29

29

R0

T0

34

34

PN-DK00

LEN000

LT00

LEN002

MDF

PN-8COT
LEN008

(No. 0)

LT01
LEN014

(No. 6)

LEN015

(No. 7)

PAGING EQUIPMENT
G

CONTROL
CIRCUIT

R6

15

15

T6

40

40

R7

16

16

Ring

T7

41

41

Tip

SPEAKER

SPEECH
PATH
CIRCUIT
G

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
G

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
LEN008
LEN009

LEN015
LEN016

LTC0 (P)

1
2
3
4

K0

26
27
28
29

26
27
28
29

9
10

R0
R1

34
35

T0
T1

34
35

14
15

R6
R7

40
41

T6
T7

40
41

251

1
2
3
4

K0

T0
T1

9
10

R0
R1

T6
T7

14
15

R6
R7

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)


(1)

Requirement for Customer-owned External Tone Source/Announcement Machine


Output level
: Less than 0 dbm (Adjustable)
Output impedance : Less than 1 k (When using PN-4COT/8COT and PN-DK00)
: Less than 10 k (When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA)
Control Method
: Start - Ground Start NOTE 1
: Stop - Ground Off (Open)

NOTE 1: The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125 A.


NOTE 2: When connecting the external tone source/announcement machine using the PN-4COT/8COT
and PN-DK00 cards, an appropriate diode must be installed on the MDF, as shown on the next
page.
Page 253

252

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

(2)

Connection Outline

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Connection Outline


When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00
PBX

MDF

PN-8COT

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

Diode *
PN-DK00

* Rating for the Diode


VR Less than 50 V
IO More than 20 mA
VF Less than 1.0 V

When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA


PBX

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

PN-TNTA
JACK0
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

JACK1

When using Pin Jack on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D


PBX
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

JACK

NOTE:

When connecting the external hold tone source to Pin Jack on MP card (PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D), set JP1 on the MP card to RIGHT position.
Page 292

253

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

(3)

MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine


PIM0
J
K0

K1

26

26

K2

K3

27

27

K4

K5

28

28

K6

K7

29

29

R0

T0

34

34

R6

15

15

T6

40

40

R7

16

16

Ring

T7

41

41

Tip

PN-DK00

LEN000

LT00

LEN002

MDF

LTC0
P

PN-8COT
LEN008

(No. 0)

LT01

LEN014

(No. 6)

LEN015

(No. 7)

EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/


ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
K0
G

CONTROL
CIRCUIT

SPEECH
PATH
CIRCUIT

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
G

Continued on next page

254

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine


LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
LEN008
LEN009

LEN015
LEN016

LTC0 (P)

1
2
3
4

K0

26
27
28
29

26
27
28
29

9
10

R0
R1

34
35

T0
T1

34
35

14
15

R6
R7

40
41

T6
T7

40
41

255

1
2
3
4

K0

T0
T1

9
10

R0
R1

T6
T7

14
15

R6
R7

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

If a D.C. voltage is supplied with the tone from the external tone source/announcement machine, a
transformer or coupling capacitor should be used as shown below.

Connecting External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Supplied with D.C.


Ring

TRANSFORMER

CAPACITOR
2 F

SOURCE
R

TO COT
TO PBX

DC
VOLTAGE
SOURCE

Tip

Ring

EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/


ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE

TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
FROM PN-DK00

CAPACITOR
2 F

SOURCE

R
TO COT
TO PBX

DC
VOLTAGE
SOURCE

Tip

EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/


ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE

TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
FROM PN-DK00

256

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

External BGM Source (COT/TNT)

External BGM Source (COT/TNT)


The system can connect a maximum of 10 customer-owned BGM sources.
(1)

Connection Outline

External BGM Sources Connection Outline


When using PN-8COT
PN-8COT

MDF

BGM SOURCE
#0
BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE
#1

When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA


PN-TNTA
BGM SOURCE
#0

JACK0

BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE
#1

JACK1

257

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

External BGM Source (COT/TNT)

(2)

MDF Cross Connection


When using PN-8COT

MDF Cross Connection for External BGM Sources


PIM0
LTC0
PN-8COT

LT00

LEN000

(No. 0)

LEN001

(No. 1)

R0

T0

26

26

#0

R1

BGM SOURCE

T1

27

27

#0
#1

R6

T6

32

32

R7

T7

33

33

LEN006

(No. 6)

LEN007

(No. 7)

MDF

BGM SOURCE

LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001

LEN006
LEN007

LTC0 (P)

1
2

R0
R1

26
27

T0
T1

26
27

T0
T1

1
2

R0
R1

7
8

R6
R7

32
33

T6
T7

32
33

T6
T7

7
8

R6
R7

258

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007

Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

Power Failure Transfer (PFT)


(1)

Connection Outline

PFT Connection Outline


PZ-8PFTB

PBX

TEL

MDF

MDF

PN-8LC

PN-8COT

259

MDF

MDF

TO C.O.
LINE

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

(2)

Installation of PZ-8PFTB

STEP1: Mount the PZ-8PFTB card into the PFT slot of the PIM.
STEP2: Connect the champ connectors of 25-pair cables to the PFT0 and PFT1 connectors on the PZ8PFTB card as shown below.

Connection of 25-Pair Cable and PZ-8PFTB


PFT1 CONNECTOR

CHAMP CONNECTOR ATTACHED TO PZ-8PFTB

PZ-8PFTB

PFT0 CONNECTOR

25-PAIR CABLE

To MDF

Continued on next page

260

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

STEP3: Connect the 25-pair cables on the MDF.


This figure shows the PFT connector pin assignment for each PFT circuit number
(No. 0 - No. 7).

PFT Connector Pin Assignment


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

PFT0
Sta. R0
26
8LC. R0 27
C.O. R0 28
8COT. R0 29
Sta. R1
30
8LC. R1 31
C.O. R1 32
8COT. R1 33
Sta. R2
34
8LC. R2 35
C.O. R2 36
8COT. R2 37
Sta. R3
38
8LC. R3 39
C.O. R3 40
8COT. R3 41
Sta. R4
42
8LC. R4 43
C.O. R4 44
8COT. R4 45
Sta. R5
46
8LC. R5 47
C.O. R5 48
8COT. R5 49
50

Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0
Sta. T1
8LC. T1
C.O. T1
8COT. T1
Sta. T2
8LC. T2
C.O. T2
8COT. T2
Sta. T3
8LC. T3
C.O. T3
8COT. T3
Sta. T4
8LC. T4
C.O. T4
8COT. T4
Sta. T5
8LC. T5
C.O. T5
8COT. T5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

No. 0

No. 1

No. 2

No. 3

No. 4

No. 5

261

PFT1
Sta. R6
26
8LC. R6 27
C.O. R6 28
8COT. R6 29
Sta. R7
30
8LC. R7 31
C.O. R7 32
8COT. R7 33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Sta. T6
8LC. T6
C.O. T6
8COT. T6
Sta. T7
8LC. T7
C.O. T7
8COT. T7

No. 6

No. 7

MJ
E
27 V

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

This figure shows MDF cross connection for No. 0 circuit on the PZ-8PFTB.

MDF Cross Connection for PFT


MDF
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
PIM0
J

LTC0
P

LEN000
(No. 0)

R0
T0

1
26

1
26

LEN001
(No. 1)

R1
T1

2
27

2
27

LEN007
(No. 7)

R7
T7

8
33

8
33

PN-8COT
R0
LEN008
T0
(No. 0)

9
34

9
34

LEN009
(No. 1)

R1
T1

10
35

10
35

LEN015
(No. 7)

R7
T7

16
41

16
41

PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D

PN-8LC

LT00

LT01

MJ
MN

25
50

TO C.O. LINE
TO STATION
PZ-8PFTB
PFT0
Sta. R0
Sta. T0

1
26

8LC. R0
8LC. T0

2
27
No. 0

C.O. R0
C.O. T0

3
28

8COT. R0
8COT. T0

4
29

PFT1

25
50

23
48

MJ

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
27 V
24

49

25
50

27 V
J

INSTALLATION CABLE

Continued on next page

262

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

MDF Cross Connection for PFT


1

PFT0 CONNECTOR
PFT0 (J)
1
2
3
4

Sta. R0
8LC. R0
C.O. R0
8COT. R0

26
27
28
29

PFT0 (P)
Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0

26
27
28
29

Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0

Sta. R0
8LC. R0
C.O. R0
8COT. R0

TO STATION
TO PN-8LC
TO C.O. LINE
TO PN-8COT

PFT1 CONNECTOR
PFT1 (J)

23
24
25

1
2
3
4

PFT1 (P)

48
49
50

MJ
E
27 V

48
49
50

MJ
E
27 V

23
24
25

TO PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D
TO PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

LTC0 CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)

LTC0 (P)

LEN000

1
2
3
4

R0

26
27
28
29

T0

26
27
28
29

T0

1
2
3
4

R0

TO PZ-8PFTB

LEN008

9
10
11
12

R0

34
35
36
37

T0

34
35
36
37

T0

9
10
11
12

R0

TO PZ-8PFTB

MJ

TO PZ-8PFTB

24
25

MJ

49
50

MN

49
50

MN

263

24
25

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

Alarm Display Panel (MP)

Alarm Display Panel (MP)


MDF Cross Connection for Alarm Display Panel
ALARM DISPLAY PANEL
PWR
PIM0

MJ

MIN

MDF
LTC0

PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D

MJ

25

25

MN

50

50

FRONT

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
27 V
G

REAR

LTC0 (J)
1

25

LTC0 (P)

26

MJ

50

26

MN

50

264

MN

25

MJ

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)

Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)


The MP card provides two RS-232C interface ports for SMDR/MCI.
No.0/No.1 Port : Async.: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
Direct connection
Connect the SMDR terminal and/or the VMS to the RS0-RS1 port of the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24C/CP24-D card using the RS RVS-15(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C as shown
below.

SMDR/MCI Terminal Direct Connection


PBX
PN-CP24-A
/CP24-B
/CP24-C
/CP24-D
RS 1
RS 0

TO RS-232C
PORT (25pin)
RS RVS-15(S) CA-A: 15 m (49.2 ft.)
RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.)

SMDR0/SMDR1/
MCI (VMS)

MAXIMUM 15 m (49.2 ft.)

Connection via MODEM


When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15 m (49.2 ft.), connect the
SMDR terminal and/or the VMS to the RS0-RS1 port of the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D
card through the MODEMs using the RS NORM-4(S) CA-A as shown below.

SMDR/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs


PBX
PN-CP24-A
/CP24-B
/CP24-C
/CP24-D

MODEM

MODEM
2P
TO RS-232C
PORT

RS 1
RS 0

SMDR0/SMDR1/
MCI (VMS)
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A: 4 m (13.1 ft.)

MODEM INTERFACE
CABLE (STRAIGHT)

MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)

265

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)

RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A


RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C
RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C
NOTE:

If the terminal does not send DTR or RTS signal, cut the signal lead marked by in the D-Sub
connector (terminal side) as shown in the wiring diagram below.
See RS-232C Connector Layout.
Page 274

RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A: 15 m (49.2 ft.)


D-sub 25pin
(male)

RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C/


RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.)
06D-TXC (1)

15-TXC (2)

06B-RXC

17-RXC

06A-TXC (2)

24-TXC (1)

05C-DTR

06-DSR

05B-GND

01-GND

05A-TXD

03-RXD

04B-RXD

02-TXD

04A-RTS

08-DCD

03B-CTS

05-CTS

03A-DSR

NOTE

02B-GND
02A-DCD
01C-LALB

D
06 TXC (1)

20-DTR

04-RTS

07-GND

18-LALB

13

----

12

----

11

----

10

----

09

----

----

RXC

TXC (2)

08

DCD

05

----

DTR

GND

TXD

07

GND

04

----

----

RXD

RTS

06

DSR

03

----

----

CTS

DSR

05

CTS

02

----

----

GND

DCD

04

RTS

01

----

LALB

----

03

RXD

02

TXD

01

GND

G: GROUND

266

25

----

24

TXC (1)

23

----

22

----

21

----

20

DTR

19

----

18

LALB

17

RXC

16

----

15

TXC (2)

14

----

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)

RS NORM-4 CA-A/RS NORM-4S CA-A


Page 274

See RS-232C Connector Layout.

4 m (13.1 ft.)
D-sub 25pin
(male)

D
06 TXC (1)

06D-TXC (1)

24-TXC (1)

06B-RXC

17-RXC

06A-TXC (2)

15-TXC (2)

05C-DTR

20-DTR

05B-GND

01-GND

05A-TXD

02-TXD

04B-RXD

03-RXD

04A-RTS

04-RTS

03B-CTS

05-CTS

03A-DSR

06-DSR

02B-GND

07-GND

02A-DCD

08-DCD

01C-LALB

18-LALB

13

----

----

RXC

TXC (2)

12

----

05

----

DTR

GND

TXD

11

----

04

----

----

RXD

RTS

10

----

03

----

----

CTS

DSR

09

----

02

----

----

GND

DCD

08

DCD

01

----

LALB

----

07

GND

06

DSR

05

CTS

04

RTS

03

RXD

02

TXD

01

GND

G: GROUND

267

25

----

24

TXC (1)

23

----

22

----

21

----

20

DTR

19

----

18

LALB

17

RXC

16

----

15

TXC (2)

14

----

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP)

Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP)


[Series 3400 software enhancement]
The ETHER card (PZ-M606-A) on the MP card provides on LAN interface port for SMDR/PMS.
Connect the SMDR/PMS terminal to LAN port of the PZ-M606A-A card on the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D card using 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable as shown below.

SMDR/PMS Terminal Connection


PBX
Switching HUB

PN-CP24-A
/CP24-B
/CP24-C
/CP24-D

LAN
TO LAN PORT
SMDR/PMS

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable

PZ-M606-A

The LAN interface specifications are listed below.

Item
Physical layer
Connection layer
TCP/IP protocol
Socket interface
Transport protocol
Application port number
Number of connection
Client/Server
Transmission code
Quasi-normal restriction condition
NOTE:

Specifications
Ethernet
The Ethernet packet format complies with the DIX standard.
ARP,IP,ICMP,UDP,TCP
Complies with 4.3 BSD socket interface
TCP stream type protocol
SMDR : 60010 (fixed)
PMS : 60050 (fixed)
1
Client : SMDR/PMS terminal
Server: PBX
7-bit ASCII code
1. When connection is closed.
2. Status monitoring text

The MP card in Main site communicates with the SMDR/PMS terminal. Therefore, in the communication settings in SMDR/PMS terminal side, set the IP address to connected to the address
specified by office data (CM0BY=00>00 or CM0BY=02>03), and application port number
shown in the above table.
268

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)


The PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D card provides 4 RS-232C interface ports for SMDR, PMS, MCI, CIS Printer, Hotel Printer.
(1)

SMDR/PMS/MCI (VMS)
Direct Connection
Connect the terminal to the RS0-RS3 port of the PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D card using the RS RVS15(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C as shown below.
See Page 266 also.

SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Direct Connection


PBX
(PIM0 - PIM7)
RS0 - RS3
PNAP00-B/
AP00-D

TO RS-232C PORT

RS RVS-15(S) CA-A : 15 m (49.2 ft.)


RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.)

SMDR0/SMDR1/
PMS/MCI (VMS)
NOTE

MAXIMUM 15 m (49.2 ft.)

NOTE:

PMS cannot be used with PN-AP00-D card.

269

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

Connection via MODEM


When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15 m (49.2 ft), MODEMs are
required. Use RS NORM-4S CA-A as shown below.
See Page 267 also.

SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs


INTERFACE CABLE
(FOR STRAIGHT
CONNECTION)
PBX
(PIM0 - PIM7)
RS0 - RS3
2P

PNAP00-B/
AP00-D

TO RS-232C PORT
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A:
4 m (13.1 ft.)

MODEM

MODEM

SMDR0/SMDR1/
PMS/MCI (VMS)
NOTE

MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)


MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W)
1200 BPS (LEASED TYPE)

NOTE:

PMS cannot be used with PN-AP00-D card.

270

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

(2)

CIS Printer/Hotel Printer


Direct Connection
Connect a maximum of two printers to the PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D using the RS PRT-15(S)
CA-A/RS PRT-15(S) CA-C as shown below.

Printer Direct Connection


PBX

PNAP00-B/
AP00-D

RS0-RS3
CONNECTOR

PRINTER0/PRINTER1

RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A/


RS PRT-15 CA-C/RS PRT-15S CA-C : 15 m (49.2 ft.)

MAXIMUM 15 m (49.2 ft.)

Connection via MODEM


When the cable length between the printer and the PBX is more than 15 m (49.2 ft.), MODEMs are
required.

Printer Connection via MODEMs


INTERFACE CABLE
(FOR STRAIGHT
CONNECTION)

PBX

PNAP00-B/
AP00-D

RS0-RS3
CONNECTOR

2P

MODEM
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A : 4 m (13.1 ft.)

MODEM

PRINTER0/PRINTER1

MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)


MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W)
1200 BPS (LEASED TYPE)

271

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A


Page 274

See RS-232C Connector Layout.

15 m (49.2 ft.)

05C-DTR
05B-GND

01-GND

05A-TXD

03-RXD

03B-CTS

20-DTR

03A-DSR

02B-GND

07-GND

06

----

----

----

----

05

----

DTR

GND

TXD

04

----

----

----

----

03

----

----

----

DSR

02

----

----

GND

----

01

----

----

----

----

272

13

----

12

----

11

----

10

----

09

----

08

----

07

GND

06

----

05

----

04

----

03

RXD

02

----

01

GND

25

----

24

----

23

----

22

----

21

----

20

DTR

19

----

18

----

17

----

16

----

15

----

14

----

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

RS PRT-15 CA-C/RS PRT-15S CA-C


Page 274

See RS-232C Connector Layout.

15 m (49.2 ft.)

05B-GND

01-GND

05A-TXD

03-RXD

03A-DSR

20-DTR

02B-GND

07-GND

06

----

----

----

----

05

----

----

GND

TXD

04

----

----

----

----

03

----

----

----

DSR

02

----

----

GND

----

01

----

----

----

----

273

13

----

12

----

11

----

10

----

09

----

08

----

07

GND

06

----

05

----

04

----

03

RXD

02

----

01

GND

25

----

24

----

23

----

22

----

21

----

20

DTR

19

----

18

----

17

----

16

----

15

----

14

----

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

RS-232C Connector Layout


SIGNAL-NAME
PIN
NO. RS-232C JIS C6361 ITU-T
V.24

SIGNAL
DIRECTION
ANOTHER

MEANING

AA

(FG)

101

GND

Frame Ground

BA

SD

103

TXD

BB

RD

104

RXD

CA

RS

105

RTS

CB

CS

106

CTS

DCE

Clear to Send

CC

DR

107

DSR

DCE

Data Set Ready

AB

SG

102

GND

CF

CD

109

DCD

DTE
DCE
DTE

Send Data
Receive Data
Request to Send

Signal Ground
DCE

Data Channel Receive Carrier


Detect

Not Used

10

Not Used

11

PB

Peripheral Busy

12

SCF

BCD

122

DCE

Backward Channel Receive Carrier


Detect

13

SCB

BCS

121

DCE

Backward Channel Send (OK)

14

SBA

BSD

118

15

DB

ST2

114

16

SBB

BRD

119

17

DD

RT

115

DTE
TXC (2)
RXC

Backward Channel Send Data

DCE

Send Signal Element Timing

DCE

Backward Channel Receive Data

DCE

Receive Signal Element Timing

18

Not Used

19

SCA

BRS

120

20

CD

ER

108/2

21

CG

SQD

110

22

CE

CI

125

23

CI, CH

SRS

112, 111

24

DA

ST1

113

DTR
RI

DTE

Backward Channel Send Detect

DTE

Data Terminal Ready

DCE

Data Signal Quality Detect

DCE

Call Indication

TXC (1)

25

DCE

Data Signal Speed Choice


Send Signal Element Timing
Not Used

274

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS

MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS


(1)

Before mounting the circuit cards, confirm the following items.


ATTENTION

Wrist Strap is connected to Frame Ground.


See CHAPTER 2 Static Electricity Guard.

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

Page 63

Switch settings of circuit cards are already completed. See CHAPTER 3.

Page 289

The SW1 switches of all PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards are turned off.


(2)

Mount circuit cards into their mounting positions according to the Bay Face Layout and Port
Assignment Table given in the Office Data Programming Manual. See CHAPTER 1 MOUNTING
CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS.
Page 45
This figure shows the mounting method of circuit cards.

Mounting of Circuit Cards

TO FRAME GROUND CONNECTION

WRIST STRAP

CARD FRONT SIDE

275

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS

(3)

Fix the CARD STOPPER according to the following procedure.

STEP1: After mounting all circuit cards slide the CARD STOPPER to the left.
STEP2: Tighten the screws of the CARD STOPPER as shown below.
NOTE:

When sliding the PIM CARD STOPPER, loosen all of the screws securing the PIM CARD
STOPPER and the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card (the screws need not to be removed).

Installation of the CARD STOPPER


CIRCUIT CARD

CARD
STOPPER
CIRCUIT CARD

SCREW

SCREW

SLIDE THE CARD


STOPPER TO THE LEFT.

276

CARD
STOPPER

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
There are two methods for System Initialization. The first method is to Clear All Data,
except LEN000 as a CAT terminal, and then program the System Data. The second
method is to use the Resident System Program, which causes the system to configure
itself automatically to the default settings, wherever the line/trunk cards are installed.

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

NOTE 1: See CHAPTER 3 for MP switch settings.


Page 292
NOTE 2: Refer to the Command Manual for default settings on the Resident System Program.

All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT


STEP1: Turn on the SW1 switch on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
- The ON lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
STEP2: On the MP Card, set SW3 to B and press SW1.
STEP3: When the MN lamp on the system is lit, set SW3 to the 0 position.

Resident System Program


STEP1: Mount the line/trunk cards into PIM.
STEP2: Turn on the SW1 switch on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
- The ON lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
STEP3: On the MP card, set SW3 to C and press SW1.
- After 30 to 40 seconds, the MN lamp turns on.
- The system has loaded the Resident System Program.
NOTE:

If the MJ lamp is lit, repeat Step 3.

STEP4: On the MP card, set SW3 to the 0 position.

277

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

SYSTEM DATA ENTRY


There are two methods for data entry, using a Customer Administration Terminal (CAT)
or a Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT).

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

Handling
Precautions Required

NOTE:

For assigning system data, refer to the Command Manual.

CAT
Any Dterm can be assigned as a CAT through programming. The Dterm can still be used as a regular telephone when it is not in CAT mode. If the system is initialized by C (Resident System Program), every
Dterm will be able to go into CAT mode. If the system is initialized by B (All Clear), only LEN000 is
assigned as a CAT port (the DLC card must be installed in slot LT00).
To use a Dterm as a CAT, follow the procedures shown below.
NOTE:

It is necessary to complete Steps 1 through 6 within 4 seconds.

To set CAT mode:


1.

Press TRF or Transfer

2.

Press CNF or Conf


- CNF/Conf lamp flashes

3.

Press *
- CNF/Conf lamp is off

4.

Press TRF or Transfer

5.

Press CNF or Conf


- CNF/Conf lamp flashes

6.

Press #
- CNF/Conf, SPKR/Speaker, FNC/Feature lamps are lit
- CAT MODE is displayed on the LCD

7.

Press LNR/SPD or Redial


- COMMAND = - is displayed on the LCD

278

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

To reset CAT mode:


While COMMAND = - is displayed on the LCD:
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

1.

Lift the handset (off hook)


-SPKR/Speaker lamp turns off.

2.

Restore the handset (on hook)


-CNF/Conf, FNC/Feature lamps turn off.
-LCD returns to clock.

Handling
Precautions Required

MAT
Refer to the MATWorX User Guide.

Confirming Lamp Indication


After system data entry, confirm proper operation of the system using indicator lamps.
RUN Lamp Flashing (120 IPM)
Check that the RUN lamps of PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D card and other application circuit cards are flashing.
ON Lamps of All PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards Lightning
Check that the ON lamps of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards are lightning and their MJ/MN
lamps have gone out.
BL Lamps Gone Out
Check that the BL lamps of all the line/trunk circuit cards have gone out. If BL lamps are flashing,
it means that the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or the system data for this card is not
assigned.
For more details of lamp indication, see CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS. For information of maintenance servicing and troubleshooting of the equipment, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.

279

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
OPERATION TEST

OPERATION TEST
Confirm the entered system data and hardware, including cable connection, by completing the following
operational tests.
Basic Connection Test at MDF
Station Line Test (Operator Call from all stations)
Central Office Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing)
Tie Line Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing)
Service Feature Test
Call Transfer
Step Call
Executive Right of Way (Executive Override)
Call Hold
Call Back
Call Forwarding-All Calls/Dont Answer (No Answer)/Busy Line
Call Pickup
Station Hunting-Pilot/Circular
Speed Calling-Station/System (Station Speed Dialing/System Speed Dialing)
Paging Access (External Paging with Meet-me)
Announcement Service
Other selected features
NOTE:

Feature names in the parenthesis are for North America.

280

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA SAVE/CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK

SYSTEM DATA SAVE


After system data entry, save the system data to floppy diskette. Refer to Maintenance Manual for the
operation of system data save.

CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK


Cleaning
Clean the following places:

Inside of the main equipment, especially the bottom of the base.


On the Top Cover.
Around the Main Equipment and the MDF.
Keyboard on the Attendant Console.

Visual Check
(1)
(2)
(3)

Check to see if all circuit cards are in their positions correctly.


Check that the cable connections in the PIM are correctly and completely connected, and the routing
of the cables has been done smoothly and neatly.
Check to see if the MAT is removed.

281

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MOUNTING FRONT COVER

MOUNTING FRONT COVER

NOTE:

When the system is a multiple-Module configuration, attach the FRONT COVER of those other
than bottom Module in the following procedures.
(1)

Remove two screws located on the inside of the FRONT COVER, and remove the
BRACKET.

(2)

Insert the BRACKET from under the hook of the FRONT COVER and fix the BRACKET
to the FRONT COVER with screws.

(3)

Attach the FRONT COVER in an order from top-stack PIM.


FRONTCOVER
BRACKET

SCREW

282

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

BACKUP CPU SYSTEM


The Backup CPU system has two MP cards (MP0, MP1) for active/stand by per system.
The system can execute the changeover of active/stand by MP cards according to the emergency notice
(EMA) from the MP card.
[Series 3200 R6.1 software required]

Required Equipment
Required Equipment for Backup CPU System
EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION

QUANTITY

REMARKS

SN1658 PIMMF
SN1664 PIMMH
[For EU]

PIM for Backup CPU system

For PIM0

PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B

MP Card for Backup CPU


system

For MP0 and MP1

283

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

Service Conditions
(1)

Date and time for system clock must be set by CM02.


The system clock is updated hourly from the active MP card to the stand by MP card.
(2) The MP0 and MP1 cards must have the same configuration.
The same software version must be provided to the MP0 and MP1 cards.
When one MP card mounts the ETHER card, another MP card must mount the ETHER card.
The same type of Key FD data must be loaded to the MP0 and MP1 cards.
You must prepare two Key FDs per each Key FD function and load the Key FD data to the MP0
and MP1 cards respectively.
(3) Automatic office data copy from the active MP card to the stand by MP card can be executed once
to four times a day by CM43 Y=4>00-03.
(4) The Day/Night mode change in each tenant is updated every two hours from the active MP card to
the stand by MP card.
(5) The MAT and OAI terminal that are connected to the system are available after MP cards changeover
occurs. But, the DtermIPs that are connected via Virtual IPT or router to the system are not available
for a several minutes until the APR table is updated.
(6) When MP cards changeover occurs while copying the office data from the active MP card to the
stand by MP card, the office data that has been copied is cancelled and the office data copy cannot
be executed.
(7) When MP cards changeover occurs while executing the system data backup of the stand by MP card,
the MP cards changeover will be executed after executing system data backup.
(8) When MP cards changeover occurs, the DtermIP with protected login mode requires the login
operation again.
(9) While copying the office data from the active MP card to the stand by MP card, saving/loading/
verifying of the office data and the AP program downloading cannot be executed from the MAT.
An error message is indicated on the MAT.
(10) While saving/loading/verifying of the office data and executing the AP program download from the
MAT, the office data cannot be copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card.
(11) Peg count data and fault information can be taken over the stand by MP card from the active MP card
after MP cards changeover occurs.

284

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

Installation Procedure
Install the Backup CPU system according to the procedure as shown below.
For switch settings on the MP card (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B), see PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP).
Page 298
For mounting locations of the MP card, see Mounting Locations of MP Cards.
Page 286
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)

Set the SW3 switch on the MP0 card to 2/3 (Off-line), and mount the MP0 card into MP00 slot.
Turn the system power ON.
Connect the MAT to the MP0 card, and clear all system data by CM00.
Assign the necessary office data to the MP0 card (Date and time must be assigned by CM02).
Then execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0.
Load the Key FD data to the MP0 card.
When setting the automatic office data copy from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at the
predetermined time, assign the data below.
The office data can be copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card once to four times a
day. Maximum four starting time for automatic office data copy can be set to the system.
CM43 Y=4>00-03: HH MM
HH : Hour (00-23)
MM: Minutes (00-59)
If no data is set, the office data is copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at 2:00 a.m.
Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to ON (UP position).
Set the SW3 switch on the MP1 card to 2/3 (Off-line).
Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to ON (UP position), and mount the MP1 card into MP01 slot.
Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to OFF (DOWN position).
Connect the MAT to the MP1 card, and clear all system data by CM00.
Load the Key FD data to the MP1 card.
Flip the MB switch on the MP0 and MP1 cards to ON (UP position), and set the SW3 switch on the
MP0 and MP1 cards to 0 (On-line).
Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to OFF (DOWN position) and confirm if the RUN lamp on the
MP0 card lights.
Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to OFF (DOWN position).
- The MP0 acts. The RUN lamp on the MP0 card flashes at 120IPM.
- The MP1 card comes into a stand by mode. The STBY lamp lights and the RUN lamp flashes in
a slow pace, on the MP1 card.
- 3 to 6 minutes later, the office data copy from the MP0 to MP1 card starts. The RUN lamp on the
MP1 card flashes intermittently.
- When the office data copy finishes, the system data backup of MP1 card is executed. The RUN
lamp is out and the SYSD lamp lights, on the MP1 card (About 1 minute).
- When the system data backup finishes, the RUN lamp on the MP1 card flashes in a slow pace
(Maximum 10 minutes later).

285

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

Mounting Locations of MP Cards


The mounting locations of the MP cards are illustrated below.
Mount the MP0 (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B) card into MP00 slot.
Mount the MP1 (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B) card into MP01 slot.
NOTE:

Flip the MB switch on the MP card to ON (UP position), before mounting the MP card.

Mounting Locations of PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B Card

PFT

MP00

MP01

LT10/AP10

LT09/AP09

LT08/AP08

LT07/AP07

LT06/AP06

LT05/AP05

LT04/AP04

LT03/AP03

LT02/AP02

LT01/AP01

LT00/AP00

VM

PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)

AC/DC
PWR

LTC0

DC/DC
PWR

LTC1

LTC2

LTC3

BWB

MP0

MP1

286

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

MP System Changeover
Automatic Changeover
By detecting the emergency notice (EMA), the system executes the changeover from the MP0 to the
MP1 or from the MP1 to the MP0 automatically.
Manual Changeover
There are two ways for manual changeover as follows.
Case1

By MB Switch Setting:
Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to ON (UP position).
- Now changeover is executed.
When you want the stand by MP card to return to the active MP, flip the MB switch on
the stand by MP card to OFF (DOWN position), then flip the MB switch on the active
MP card to ON (UP position).

Case2

By System Data Setting:


Assign the following data for changeover.
CME0 Y=6>3600: MM DD HH mm
MM: Month (01-12)
DD : Date (01-31)
HH : Hour (00-23)
mm : Minute (00-59)

NOTE:

After setting the first data, the MAT indicates INITIAL?_.


Then input the present time. Now changeover is executed.
When there is no MP card for stand by, or the MB switch on the MP card in stand by is ON (UP
position), the MAT indicates HARDWARE ERROR.

287

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

Office Data Copy


There are two ways for office data copy as follows.
Automatic Office Data Copy
When a Stand by MP starts:
3 to 6 minutes later after the MP card has entered into a stand by mode, all office data are copied from
the active MP card to the stand by MP card automatically.
At a Predetermined Time:
The office data is copied automatically from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at the predetermined time assigned by CM43 Y=4>00-03 once to four times a day.
NOTE:

If you set two or more starting time for automatic office data copy, set the time with fifteen minutes or more intervals.

Manual Office Data Copy


Set the data for manual office data copy as follows.
CMEC Y=5>0: 0 (start copy)
NOTE:

1 is displayed during the office data is being copied.

288

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2002.fm

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS

CHAPTER 3
LAMP INDICATIONS AND
SWITCH SETTINGS

This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the switch settings
of each circuit card used in the system.

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ..............................................


CONTROL CARD ......................................................................
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD ........................................
LINE/TRUNK CARD ..................................................................

289

290
291
319
484

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER


This chapter explains the following items about each circuit card used in this system. Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the circuit card names within each circuit card category (Control, Application
Processor, and Line/Trunk).
(1)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors


The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors of each circuit card are shown by a face layout.

(2)

Lamp Indications
The name, color, and functions of each indicator lamp equipped on each circuit card are described in
a table.

(3)

Switch Settings
The name, settings, and functions of each switch equipped on each circuit card are described in a
table.

Each switch setting table has a CHECK column. Make necessary entries in the CHECK column during
and/or after the system installation and maintenance, and use each table as a reference for subsequent system maintenance and operations.

290

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3001.fm

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


CONTROL CARD

CONTROL CARD
The table below shows the control cards to be explained in this section.

List of Control Cards

NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)

LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED

REFERENCE
PAGE

Page 292

PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D (MP)

PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B (MP)

Page 298

PN-CP15 (FP)

Page 303

PN-PW00
(EXTPWR)

Page 305

PZ-M606-A
(ETHER)

Page 307

PZ-PW121
(AC/DC PWR)

Page 309

PZ-PW126
(AC/DC PWR)

Page 312

PZ-PW122
(DC/DC PWR)

Page 315

PZ-PW135
(PWR)

Page 317

*MB = Make Busy

291

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

JP1

SW3
RUN
SW1
SW2

VR

JACK
SYSD
L0
CLK IN

JP0
SW4
RS1
RS0
CONN
DK

CONN: To CONN connector on PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

292

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flash (120 IPM) : On Line


Flash (slowly)
: Off Line
OFF or ON
: This card is not operating.
Lights momentarily when initializing this card.

SYSD

Red

Flashes while writing the system data for backup to the Flash Memory.
Lights while copying the system data from the Flash Memory to the
SDRAM.

L0

Green

Flashes at 240 IPM while copying the MP program from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 240 IPM while downloading the MP program to the Flash Memory (outdated side).
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, remains lit when the MP program downloaded to the
Flash Memory (outdated side) is completed.
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, disappears when the program change of the Flash
Memory (outdated side) and the Flash Memory (upgraded side) is completed.
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 120 IPM when the MP program download
to the Flash Memory (outdated side) is interrupted/fails.
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 60 IPM while copying the program of
Flash Memory (upgraded side) to the Flash Memory (outdated side).
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes specially (ON : Off = 7 : 3) when the program copy from the Flash Memory (upgraded side) to the Flash Memory (outsided side) is completed
[Series 3500 software required]

CLK IN

Green

Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.


293

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW3 (Rotary SW)

NOTE 1

0-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

On Line
(Call processing is in progress)

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: As per CM40 Y=08

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)

Debug Mode
(For collecting control signals between
MP and SIP cards)

5
NOTE 2

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 9600 bps

6
NOTE 2

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 19200 bps

7
NOTE 2

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 38400 bps

8
NOTE 2

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 57600 bps

For clearing the office data

For setting the resident system program

1, 9
A, D-F

Not used

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: Only when executing MP Program Download (Local download) using MATWorX, set the
SW3 to 5-8.
Continued on next page

294

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1 (Push SW)

SW2
(Piano SW)

FUNCTION

CHECK

For initializing CPU

ON

A-law (Australia)

OFF

-law (North America)

Selection of PLO0 input


(Phase Locked Oscillator)
For clock receiver office:

OFF
4
3
2
1

SW2-2 SW2-3
ON

2, 3

FUNCTION

OFF

OFF

1.5 MHz clock


[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZM649]

ON

OFF

192 kHz clock


[For PN-BRTA]

OFF

ON

2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]

ON

ON

Not used

For clock source office:


SW2-3
SW2-2
OFF
OFF
4

ON

When using RS1 port for built-in


MODEM

OFF

When using RS1 port for RS-232C


Continued on next page

295

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

SWITCH NAME
SW4 (Dip SW)
ON

1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

CHECK

Selection of PLO1 input


(Phase Locked Oscillator)
For clock receiver office:

3, 4

SW4-3

SW4-4

FUNCTION

OFF

OFF

1.5 MHz clock


[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZM649]

ON

OFF

192 kHz clock


[For PN-BRTA]

OFF

ON

2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]

ON

ON

Not used

For clock source office:


SW4-3
SW4-4
OFF
OFF
VR (Rotary SW)

DK (Connector)

Variable Resistor for External Hold


Tone Source
(Volume [low to high] : Clockwise)

02

Ground detection

01

Ground sending

02
01

Continued on next page

296

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

SWITCH NAME
JP0 (Jumper pin)

Front

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

UP

For normal operation


(Battery backup ON)

DOWN

Not used
(Battery backup OFF)

RIGHT

For using external hold tone source


(When Pin Jack on the MP card is in
use)

LEFT

For using internal hold tone source


(When Merody IC on the MP card is in
use)

JP1 (Jumper pin)

Front

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

297

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

JP1

SW3
RUN
SW1
SW2
JACK
VR

JP0

SYSD
L0
CLK IN
STBY
MB

SW4

CONN

RS1
RS0
DK

CONN: To CONN connector on PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flash (120 IPM) : On Line


Flash (slowly) : Off Line
OFF or ON
: This card is not operating.
Lights momentarily when initializing this card.

SYSD

Red

Flashes at 240 IPM while writing the system data for backup to the
Flash Memory. Lights while copying the system data from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.

L0

Green

Flashes at 240 IPM while copying the MP program from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.

CLK IN

Green

Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.

STBY

Red

Remains lit while this card is a stand by mode.

298

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW3 (Rotary SW)

CHECK

On Line
(Call processing is in progress)

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: As per CM40 Y=08

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)

Debug Mode
(For collecting control signals between
MP and SIP cards)

NOTE 1

0-F

FUNCTION

5
NOTE 2

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 9600 bps

6
NOTE 2

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 19200 bps

7
NOTE 2

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 38400 bps

8
NOTE 2

Off Line (Call processing is stopped)


I/O port: 57600 bps

For clearing the office data

For setting the resident system program

1, 9
A, D-F

Not used

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: Only when executing MP Program Download using MATWorX, set the SW3 to 5-8.
Continued on next page

299

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1 (Push SW)

SW2
(Piano SW)

FUNCTION

CHECK

For initializing CPU

OFF

ON

A-law (Australia)

OFF

-law (North America)

Selection of PLO0 input


(Phase Locked Oscillator)
For clock receiver office:

4
3
2
1

SW2-2 SW2-3

FUNCTION

ON

2, 3

OFF

OFF

1.5 MHz clock


[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZM649]

ON

OFF

192 kHz clock


[For PN-BRTA]

OFF

ON

2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]

ON

ON

Not used

For clock source office:


SW2-3
SW2-2
OFF
OFF
4

ON

When using RS1 port for built-in


MODEM

OFF

When using RS1 port for RS-232C


Continued on next page

300

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

SWITCH NAME
SW4 (Dip SW)
ON

1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

CHECK

Selection of PLO1 input


(Phase Locked Oscillator)
For clock receiver office:

3, 4

SW4-3

SW4-4

FUNCTION

OFF

OFF

1.5 MHz clock


[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZM649]

ON

OFF

192 kHz clock


[For PN-BRTA]

OFF

ON

2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]

ON

ON

Not used

For clock source office:


SW4-3
SW4-4
OFF
OFF
MB (Toggle SW)

NOTE 3
VR (Rotary SW)

UP
DOWN

For make-busy
For normal operation
Variable Resistor for External Hold
Tone Source
(Volume [low to high] : Clockwise)

NOTE 3: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

301

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

SWITCH NAME
DK (Connector)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

02

Ground detection

01

Ground sending

CHECK

02
01

JP0 (Jumper pin)

Front

UP

For normal operation


(Battery backup ON)

DOWN

Not used
(Battery backup OFF)

RIGHT

For using external hold tone source


(When Pin Jack on the MP card is in
use)

LEFT

For using internal hold tone source


(When Merody IC on the MP card is in
use)

JP1 (Jumper pin)

Front

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

302

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-CP15 (FP)

PN-CP15 (FP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
RUN

COLOR
Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while the circuit card is operating normally.

303

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PN-CP15 (FP)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SENSE
(Rotary SW)

FUNCTION

CHECK

For setting FP No.


0-3

0
1
32

NOTE 1

Not used

For mounting this card in PIM2

For mounting this card in PIM4

For mounting this card in PIM6

4-F
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

1-3

OFF

OFF

ON

4
3

2
1
ON

For normal operation


Not used

For normal operation

Not used
OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

304

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)

PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

08
07
06
05

-48 V
-48 V
E
E

04
03
02
01

-48 V
-48 V
E
E

RUN
MB

To DESKCON

CONN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
RUN

COLOR
Green

FUNCTION
Remains lit while 48 V power is being supplied.

305

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
UP

ON

NOTE

DOWN

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy
(48 V power off)
For normal operation
(48 V power on)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:

When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

306

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
FACE

REAR

LAN

CONN:
To CONN Connector
on PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP27-A (MP)

CONN
LINK
100M
TX
RX
COL

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

LINK

Green

Remains lit when link is established.

100M

Green

ON: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.


OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

TX

Green

Remains lit when transmitting the data.

RX

Green

Remains lit when receiving the data.

COL

Yellow

Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.

307

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

Mounting PZ-M606-A Card


When mounting the ETHER card on the MP card, do the following procedure.
STEP1: Take off four screws from the rear side of ETHER support.
NOTE:

Supports and screws are attached to the ETHER card.

STEP2: Connect the CONN connector on the ETHER card and the CONN connector on the MP card.
STEP3: Secure the ETHER card to the MP card with four screws which have been taken off by STEP1.

Mounting ETHER Card on MP card

Support

CONN Connector of ETHER Card

ETHER Card

ETHER Card

MP Card

CONN Connector on MP Card

308

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)


Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW 301
SW 102
MJ
MN
ON
SW 101

MJ
MN
ON
CN103 (SIGNAL)

CN104

BATT

BATT

SW2
ON

CN1

OFF
SW 1

SW2

309

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

MJ

Red

Remains lit when a major trouble occurs or resident system program is


not properly loaded.

MN

Yellow

Remains lit when a minor trouble occurs or resident system program is


successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out.

ON

Green

Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1

SW2
100/120 V AC

For turning AC power and the battery


on

OFF

For turning AC power and the battery


off

FORWARD

AC INPUT: 90 V-132 V

BACKWARD

AC INPUT: 180 V-264 V

240 V AC

SW101
(Piano key)

OFF

Not used

ON

Float charging, for sealed batteries


(Normal Setting).
OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of
external vented batteries.

OFF

Float charging, for vented batteries


only.

ON
1

2
OFF

CHECK

ON
ON
OFF

FUNCTION

Continued on next page

310

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW301 (Dip SW)


90 V

75 V

FUNCTION

ON

CR Voltage: 75 Vrms

OFF

CR Voltage: 90 Vrms

ON

Frequency: 20 Hz

OFF

Frequency: 25 Hz

CHECK

1
OFF

ON
2

25 Hz

SW102

20 Hz

PRESS
MOMENTARILY

To start each PIM on battery power


when AC power is not provided

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

311

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)


Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW 301
SW 102
MJ
MN
ON
SW 101

MJ
MN
ON
CN103 (SIGNAL)

CN104

BATT

BATT

ON

CN1

OFF
SW 1

312

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

MJ

Red

Remains lit when a major trouble occurs or resident system program is


not properly loaded.

MN

Yellow

Remains lit when a minor trouble occurs or resident system program is


successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out.

ON

Green

Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1

SW101
(Piano key)

For turning AC power and the battery


on

OFF

For turning AC power and the battery


off

OFF

Not used

ON

Float charging, for sealed batteries


(Normal Setting).
OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of
external vented batteries.

OFF

Float charging, for vented batteries


only.

ON
1

2
OFF

CHECK

ON
ON
OFF

FUNCTION

Continued on next page

313

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW301 (Dip SW)


90 V

75 V

FUNCTION

ON

CR Voltage: 75 Vrms

OFF

CR Voltage: 90 Vrms

ON

Frequency: 20 Hz

OFF

Frequency: 25 Hz

CHECK

1
OFF

ON
2

25 Hz

SW102

20 Hz

PRESS
MOMENTARILY

To start each PIM on battery power


when AC power is not provided

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

314

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)


Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CONN

ON

SW
CONN connector:
To PWR1 connector on PIM BWB

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (-48 V, E):


To PWR0C connector on PIM BWB

315

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

ON

Green

FUNCTION
Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME
SW

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

ON

For turning AC power on

OFF

For turning AC power off

CHECK

ON
OFF

316

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW135 (PWR)

PZ-PW135 (PWR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

MJ
MN
ON

MJ
MN
ON
SIG

SW1

-27 V
FG
GND

ON
DC INPUT

SW
OFF

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

MJ

Red

Remains lit when a major trouble occurs or resident system program is


not properly loaded.

MN

Yellow

Remains lit when a minor trouble occurs or resident system program is


successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out.

ON

Green

Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.

317

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

PZ-PW135 (PWR)

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW

SW1 (Piano Key SW)

CHECK

ON

For turning DC power and the battery


on

OFF

For turning DC power and the battery


off

ON

CR Voltage: 75 Vrms

OFF

CR Voltage: 90 Vrms

ON

Frequency: 20 Hz

OFF

Frequency: 25 Hz

ON
OFF

FUNCTION

1
ON
1
2
OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

318

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3002.fm

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD

APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD


The table below shows the application processor cards to be explained in this section.

List of Application Processor Cards

NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)

LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
REFERENCE
: ALLOWED
PAGE
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT ALLOWED

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

Page 321

PN-AP00-D (AP00)

Page 327

PN-AP00-B (DBM)

Page 333

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Page 336

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Page 341

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Page 346

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Page 351

PN-24CCTA (CCT)

Page 359

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

Page 365

PN-CFTC (CFT)

Page 372

PN-CFTC-A (CFT)

Page 374

PN-DAIA-A
(DAIA)

Page 376

PN-DAIB (DAIB)

Page 381

PN-DAIC (DAIC)

Page 385

PN-DAID-A
(DAID)

Page 388

PN-DAIE (DAIE)

Page 394

PN-DAIF (DAIF)

Page 398

PN-DTA/
PN-DTB (CCH)

Page 402
Continued on next page

*MB = Make Busy


319

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD

List of Application Processor Card

NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)

LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
REFERENCE
: ALLOWED
PAGE
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT ALLOWED

PN-DTA
(CCT/DTI/PRT)

Page 407

PN-DTB
(CCT/DTI/PRT)

Page 414

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Page 421

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Page 427

PN-8ETIA (HUB)

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Page 435

PN-8IPTA (SIP)

Page 440

PN-IPTB (IPT)

Page 444

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

Page 448

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Page 456

PN-4RSTB (MFR)

Page 463

PN-4RSTC/
PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)

Page 465

PN-SC00 (CCH)

Page 467

PN-SC01 (DCH)

Page 470

PN-SC03-B/
PN-SC03-C (CSH)

Page 473

PN-SC03-B (ICH)

Page 475

PZ-M537
(EXPMEM)

PZ-M542 (CONN)

Page 480

PZ-M557 (CONN)

Page 482

Page 433

Page 477

*MB = Make Busy

320

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

PN-AP00-B (AP00)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CONN
SENSE
RUN
MB

JP0

SW1
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS3
RS2
RS1

JP1

RS0

SW0

SW2

CONN: To CONNR connector on PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

321

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

L0-L3

Green

Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250


0

1 (port0)-3 (port2)

L3

Indication of transmitting
status of port0

Indication of CTS signal status on


port0-2

L2

Indication of transmitting
status of port1

Indication of DCD signal status on


port0-2

L1

Indication of transmitting
status of port2

Indication of TXD signal status on


port0-2

L0

Indication of transmitting
status of port3

Indication of RXD signal status on


port0-2

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation


Continued on next page

322

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW0 (Dip SW)


ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHECK

ON

Not used

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Sets No. 0 Port forcibly in a state which


DSR signal is always provided.

OFF

Receives DSR signal from the DCE on


No. 0 Port.

ON

Sets No. 1 Port forcibly in a state which


DSR signal is always provided.

OFF

Receives DSR signal from the DCE on


No. 1 Port.

ON

Sets No. 2 Port forcibly in a state which


DSR signal is always provided.

OFF

Receives DSR signal from the DCE on


No. 2 Port.

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

For normal operation

OFF

For AP data clearing by CMD100/


CMD101

ON

For normal operation

OFF

For AP data clearing by CMD100/


CMD101

ON

AP No. 4-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

1-3

4, 5

6
NOTE 3

7
NOTE 3

8
NOTE 3
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

FUNCTION

OFF
4
3
2
1

ON

4
Continued on next page

323

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1
NOTE 3

CHECK

ON

Sets No. 3 Port forcibly in a state which


DSR signal is always provided.

OFF

Receives DSR signal from the DCE on


No. 3 Port.

ON

Enables the receive clock from the DCE


(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the RXC terminal)

OFF

Uses internal clock as the receive


clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

ON

Enables transmit clock from the DCE


(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the TXC (2)
terminal.)

OFF

Uses internal clock as the send clock


when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

ON

Transmit the send clock from the DTE


(this card) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is transmitted from the
TXC (1) terminal)

OFF

Not transmit the send clock from the


DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is
synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

ON

When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

OFF

When No. 1 Port is synchronous.

FUNCTION

Continued on next page

324

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

ON

OFF

Enables receive clock from the DCE


(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the RXC terminal)

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

UP

For normal operation


(Battery backup ON)

DOWN

Not used
(Battery backup OFF)

6
NOTE 4

JP1 (Jumper SW)

CHECK

Uses internal clock as the receive


clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

JP0 (Jumper SW)

FUNCTION

UP
DOWN

Not used
For normal operation

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the DCE connected to the port does not provide a function to send the DSR signals, set
the switch to ON. In this case, the AP00 card cannot recognize the actual state of the DCE, so
that the call records or system messages will not be stored in the memory buffer on the AP00
card even if the cable is disconnected from the DCE.
When the switch is set to OFF, the call records or system messages will be stored when the cable
is disconnected, and will be sent when the cable is re-connected.
Continued on next page

325

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

NOTE 4: The use of the external clock (from the distant end) or the internal clock is determined by the
following table:

CLOCK

SW2
2

External

ON

OFF

Internal

OFF

ON

326

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-AP00-D (AP00)

PN-AP00-D (AP00)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

JP0

SW1
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS3
RS2
RS1

JP1

RS0

SW0

SW2

327

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-AP00-D (AP00)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

L0-L3

Green

Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250


0

1 (port0)-3 (port2)

L3

Indication of transmitting
status of port0

Indication of CTS signal status on


port0-2

L2

Indication of transmitting
status of port1

Indication of DCD signal status on


port0-2

L1

Indication of transmitting
status of port2

Indication of TXD signal status on


port0-2

L0

Indication of transmitting
status of port3

Indication of RXD signal status on


port0-2

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation


Continued on next page

328

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-AP00-D (AP00)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW0 (Dip SW)


ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHECK

ON

Not used

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Sets No. 0 Port forcibly in a state which


DSR signal is always provided.

OFF

Receives DSR signal from the DCE on


No. 0 Port.

ON

Sets No. 1 Port forcibly in a state which


DSR signal is always provided.

OFF

Receives DSR signal from the DCE on


No. 1 Port.

ON

Sets No. 2 Port forcibly in a state which


DSR signal is always provided.

OFF

Receives DSR signal from the DCE on


No. 2 Port.

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

For normal operation

OFF

For AP data clearing by CMD100/


CMD101

ON

For normal operation

OFF

For AP data clearing by CMD100/


CMD101

ON

AP No. 4-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

1-3

4, 5

6
NOTE 3

7
NOTE 3

8
NOTE 3
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

FUNCTION

OFF
4
3
2
1

ON

4
Continued on next page

329

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-AP00-D (AP00)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1
NOTE 3

CHECK

ON

Sets No. 3 Port forcibly in a state which


DSR signal is always provided.

OFF

Receives DSR signal from the DCE on


No. 3 Port.

ON

Enables the receive clock from the DCE


(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the RXC terminal)

OFF

Uses internal clock as the receive


clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

ON

Enables transmit clock from the DCE


(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the TXC (2)
terminal.)

OFF

Uses internal clock as the send clock


when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

ON

Transmit the send clock from the DTE


(this card) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is transmitted from the
TXC (1) terminal)

OFF

Not transmit the send clock from the


DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is
synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

ON

When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

OFF

When No. 1 Port is synchronous.

FUNCTION

Continued on next page

330

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-AP00-D (AP00)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

ON

OFF

Enables receive clock from the DCE


(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the RXC terminal)

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

UP

For normal operation


(Battery backup ON)

DOWN

Not used
(Battery backup OFF)

6
NOTE 4

JP1 (Jumper SW)

CHECK

Uses internal clock as the receive


clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

JP0 (Jumper SW)

FUNCTION

UP
DOWN

Not used
For normal operation

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the DCE connected to the port does not provide a function to send the DSR signals, set
the switch to ON. In this case, the AP00 card cannot recognize the actual state of the DCE, so
that the call records or system messages will not be stored in the memory buffer on the AP00
card even if the cable is disconnected from the DCE.
When the switch is set to OFF, the call records or system messages will be stored when the cable
is disconnected, and will be sent when the cable is re-connected.
Continued on next page

331

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-AP00-D (AP00)

NOTE 4: The use of the external clock (from the distant end) or the internal clock is determined by the
following table:

CLOCK

SW2
2

External

ON

OFF

Internal

OFF

ON

332

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-AP00-B (DBM)

PN-AP00-B (DBM)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CONN
SENSE
RUN
MB

JP0

SW1
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS3
RS2
RS1

JP1

RS0

SW0

SW2

CONN: Not used


RS0-RS3: Not used

333

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-AP00-B (DBM)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

L0-L3

Green

Not used

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

SW1-4: ON

AP No.

NOTE 1

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2

For normal operation

SW0 (Dip SW)


ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1-8

OFF

Not used

Continued on next page

334

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-AP00-B (DBM)

SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 4-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

OFF

Not used

UP

For normal operation


(Battery backup ON)

DOWN

Not used
(Battery backup OFF)

CHECK

OFF
4
3
2
1

ON

4
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

JP0 (Jumper SW)

JP1 (Jumper SW)

1-8

UP
DOWN

Not used
For normal operation

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

335

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

PN-BRTA (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENS
RUN
MB

B1
B2
D
ALM

SW0

SW1

336

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B1

Green

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

B2

ALM

Green

Green

Red

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

337

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be


set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2
SW0 (Dip SW)
ON

1
1 2 3 4

2
NOTE 3

3
NOTE 3

DOWN

For normal operation

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO of MP card according
to the switch setting of SW0-3.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO of MP card.

ON

Clock signal is sent to the PLO0 of MP


card.

OFF

Clock signal is sent to the PLO1 of MP


card.

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used
Continued on next page

338

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1 (Dip SW)


ON

ON
1 2

FUNCTION

CHECK

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

339

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-BRTA (BRT)

NOTE 3: Set the SW0-2 and SW0-3 as follows:


BRT0

BRT1

BRT2

----

BRT11

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW
SW SW
---0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3
0-2 0-3
When one
BRT is
provided.

When more
than one BRT is
provided.

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input.

ON ON

ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

MP card will receive the


clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
---- OFF ON
Should a clock failure occur
with BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

340

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENS
RUN
MB
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW11
SW10
SW0

341

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B21

Red

No.1 Circuit

B11

D1

Red

Green

ALM1

Red

B20

Red

B10

D0

ALM0

Red

Green

Red

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

342

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.
SW11-4: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW11-4: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0, SW10
(Dip SW)
ON

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.

1
1 2

For normal operation

Continued on next page

343

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW11 (Dip SW)


1
ON

1 2 3 4

2
NOTE 3

3
NOTE 3

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO of MP card according
to the switch setting of SW11-3.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO of MP card.

ON

Output clock signals to the PLO0 of MP


card.

OFF

Output clock signals to the PLO1 of MP


card.

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

344

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.
BRT0
CONDITIONS

When one BRT


is provided.

When more
than one BRT is
provided.

BRT1

BRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3

----

BRT23

----

SW SW
11-2 11-3

REMARKS

MP card will receive the


clock signal from No.0 circuit
of BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
Should a clock failure occur
with No.0 circuit, MP card
will switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.

ON ON

ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

MP card will receive the


clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

345

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

PN-2BRTK (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW10
SW11

SW0

346

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B21

Red

No.1 Circuit

B11

D1

Red

Green

ALM1

Red

B20

Red

B10

D0

ALM0

Red

Green

Red

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

347

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.
SW11-4: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW11-4: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0, SW10
(Dip SW)
ON

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 .

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.

1
1 2

For normal operation

Continued on next page

348

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW11 (Dip SW)


1
ON

1 2 3 4

2
NOTE 3

3
NOTE 3

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO of MP card according
to the switch setting of SW11-3.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO of MP card.

ON

Output clock signals to the PLO0 of MP


card.

OFF

Output clock signals to the PLO1 of MP


card.

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

349

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.
BRT0
CONDITIONS

When one BRT


is provided.

When more
than one BRT is
provided.

BRT1

BRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3

----

BRT23

----

SW SW
11-2 11-3

REMARKS

MP card will receive the


clock signal from No.0 circuit
of BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
Should a clock failure occur
with No.0 circuit, MP card
will switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.

ON ON

ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

MP card will receive the


clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

350

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
SW4

SW0

SW1
SW2

SW3

B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0

B23
B13
D3
ALM3
B22
B12
D2
ALM2

CN2

351

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B23

Red

No.3 Circuit

B13

D3

Red

Green

ALM3

Red

B22

Red

B12

D2

ALM2

Red

Green

Red

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.2 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
Continued on next page

352

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

LAMP
NAME
B21

B11

D1

COLOR
Red

Green

Red

B20

Red

D0

ALM0

No.1 Circuit

Red

ALM1

B10

FUNCTION

Red

Green

Red

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
No.0 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

353

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.
SW4-8: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW4-8: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation


Continued on next page

354

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW4 (Piano SW)

Output clock signals to PLO0/PLO1 of MP card. NOTE 3

OFF

FUNCTION

SW No.

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON

CHECK

Circuit No.

No.0

No.1

No.2

No.3

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

PLO0

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

PLO0

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PLO0

PLO1

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

PLO0

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

PLO0

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

PLO0

PLO1

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

PLO0

PLO1

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

PLO0

PLO1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PLO0

PLO1

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

PLO0

PLO1

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Not allowed

ON

Output clock signals according to the


switch setting of SW4-1 to SW4-4.

OFF

Output clock signals to the reverse PLO


route of the switch setting of SW4-1 to
SW4-4.

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

5
NOTE 3

Continued on next page

355

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW0 (Dip SW)


ON

CHECK

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.1
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.1
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

1 2

SW1 (Dip SW)


ON

FUNCTION

1 2

Continued on next page

356

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

CHECK

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.2
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.2 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.2
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.2 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.3
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.3 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.3
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.3 Circuit)

1 2

SW3 (Dip SW)


ON

FUNCTION

1 2

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

357

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW4-1 to SW4-5 as follows.

CONDITIONS

When one BRT is


provided.

When more than


one BRT is provided.

SWITCH

BRT0

BRT1

BRT2

SW4-1

ON

SW4-2

OFF

SW4-3

OFF

SW4-4

OFF

SW4-5

ON

SW4-1

----

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

SW4-2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

SW4-3

OFF

OFF

OFF

SW4-4

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

SW4-5

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

----

BRT23

OFF

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

358

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24CCTA (CCT)

PN-24CCTA (CCT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MAS

MB
SW1

JP1
SW0
AISS

SW2

JPR0

LC
LPB
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL

JPS
JRR1

359

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24CCTA (CCT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when a loopback test is in progress.

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)


errors.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received.


The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy


: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

NOTE 1

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

SW1-4: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW1-4: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

Continued on next page

360

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

ON

3
NOTE 7
4
NOTE 7
5
NOTE 7
6
NOTE 7

For normal operation

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Set equalizer according to the cable


length between the PBX and the CSU.

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

7
NOTE 7

OFF

OFF

SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)


40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

361

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

ON

Common channel signaling data


transmission speed (For Digital Interface)

SW2 (Dip SW)


1
ON

FUNCTION

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
2-1

48 Kbps NOTE 6
48 Kbps NOTE 6

OFF

SW
2-2

SW
2-3

SW
2-4

SW
2-5

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

56 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

64 Kbps

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)


Continued on next page

362

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH NAME
JPR0 (Jumper pin)

JPR1 (Jumper pin)

JPS (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

UP

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is not provided.

RIGHT

Line impedance: 100

LEFT

Line impedance: 110

UP

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is not provided.

DOWN

Always set to DOWN

MAS (Jumper pin)

AISS (Jumper pin)

UP

AIS signal is sent out when make-busy


or power on.

DOWN

AIS signal is not sent out when makebusy or power on.

JP1 (Jumper pin)


LEFT

Always set to LEFT

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
Continued on next page

363

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006

PN-24CCTA (CCT)

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
CCT0
CONDITIONS

When one CCT


is provided.

When more than


one CCT is provided.

CCT1

CCT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
ON OFF

CCT7
SW SW
0-1 0-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from CCT0
at its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the


clock signal from CCT0
at its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
Should a clock failure
OFF OFF
occurs with CCT0, MP
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
CCT1.

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the CCT cards mounted
in PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: Mount the CCT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW2-3: ON

SW2-3: OFF
48 Kbps
1

48 Kbps
1

Data

1
Data

NOTE 7: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.

364

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

PN-30CCTA (CCT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW

JP1

JPS

SW1

LC
LPB
PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL

JPR
JP

365

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when a loopback test is in progress.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time


slot 16.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive 1 is being


received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
: More than 10 channels are busy
OFF
: All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 to 10 channels are busy

366

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.
SW-8: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW-8: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation


Continued on next page

367

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

ON

3
4

7
8

CHECK

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Transmission line cable:


Coaxial cable (75 )

OFF

Transmission line cable:


Twisted-pair cable (120 )

ON

Loopback test

OFF

For normal operation

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

FUNCTION

Continued on next page

368

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1(Dip SW)
1
ON

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

FUNCTION

CHECK

Common channel signaling data


transmission speed (For Digital Interface)
TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

SW
1-3

SW
1-4

SW
1-5

48 Kbps NOTE 5

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

48 Kbps NOTE 5

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

56 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

64 Kbps

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)


Continued on next page

369

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT

LEFT
JPR
(Jumper pin)

JP
(Jumper pin)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission line
(For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)

DOWN

RA is grounded on the transmission line


(For coaxial cable)

RIGHT

Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)

LEFT

Line impedance: 120


(For twisted-pair cable)

JP1 (Jumper pin)


DOWN

Always set to DOWN

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

370

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

NOTE 3: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:


CCT0
CONDITIONS

When one CCT is


provided.

When more than


one CCT is
provided.

CCT1

CCT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF

CCT7
REMARKS

SW SW
-1 -2

MP card will receive the


clock signal from CCT0
at its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the


clock signal from CCT0
at its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
Should a clock failure
OFF OFF
occurs with CCT0, MP
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
CCT1.

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the CCT cards mounted in
PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW1-3: ON

SW1-3: OFF
48 Kbps
1

48 Kbps
1

Data

1
Data

NOTE 6: Mount the CCT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

371

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-CFTC (CFT)

PN-CFTC (CFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW1
RUN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Remains lit while this card is operating normally.

RUN1

Red

Remains lit while the DSP on this card is operating normally.

372

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-CFTC (CFT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.
SW1-4: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW1-4: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1 (Dip SW)
ON

1-3

For normal operation

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

1 2 3 4

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

373

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-CFTC-A (CFT)

PN-CFTC-A (CFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW1
DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Frashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

DOPE0

Green

Remains lit while the DSP on this card is operating normally.

374

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-CFTC-A (CFT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.
SW1-4: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW1-4: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

1-3

For normal operation

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

OFF
4
3
2
1

4
ON

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

375

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL

SW1
SW2

BUS

SW3
PCM1
PCM0

JPS

JPR
CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LINK

Green

Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.

RED

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment


signal loss.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.

LOOP

Not used

PWR

Not used

BL

Red

Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).


Flashes while FP data downloading.

376

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SENSE
(Rotary SW)

CHECK

FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the DAIA


card.
By this setting, the system regards the DAIA card and
the opposite DAIB card as one Firmware Processor.

0
1
2

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

SW1-4: ON
0-F

FP No. 16

FP No. 01

FP No. 17

FP No. 02

FP No. 18

FP No. 03

FP No. 19

4F
MB (Toggle SW)

SW1-4: OFF

UP

Not used
For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2

1
NOTE 3

2
NOTE 3

1
ON

3
4

For normal operation

ON

For supplying 1.5 MHz clock to


PLO0

OFF

No clock supply to PLO0

ON

For supplying 1.5 MHz clock to


PLO1

OFF

No clock supply to PLO1

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

FP No.01-03

OFF

FP No.16-19
Continued on next page

377

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48 Kbps

OFF

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64 Kbps

ON

DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi


Frame

OFF

DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi


Frame

ON

Line code: AMI with ZCS

OFF

Line code: B8ZS

ON

Setting of control signal time slot

CHECK

ON
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FUNCTION

SWITCH NUMBER

4
OFF
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF

4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

6
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

TIME SLOT
NUMBER
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS23

NOTE 4: The time slot number 0, 20,


21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/22)
cannot be used for control
signal.
NOTE 5: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAIB card.
Continued on next page

378

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW3 (Dip SW)


ON

1 2 3 4

ON
1
OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON

3
OFF

4
JPS (Jumper pin)

SW
3-1

SW
3-2

SW
3-3

CABLE
LENGTH

ON

ON

ON

0 - 40 m
(0-131.2 ft.)

ON

ON

OFF

40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)

ON

OFF

ON

80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)

ON

OFF

OFF

120 - 160 m
(394-525 ft.)

OFF

ON

ON

160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)

OFF

OFF

OFF

Signal is not sent

FP No.16

OFF

FP No.01-03, 17-19

RIGHT

CHECK

Set the equalizer according to the cable


length between the system and the
CSU.

ON

LEFT
JPR (Jumper pin)

FUNCTION

For mounting this card on PIM1 - PIM7


For mounting this card on PIM0

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is provided.

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is not provided.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

379

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When source clock signal is supplied via the line between the Main Site and the Remote Site, set
the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAIA cards (DAIA0, DAIA1) must be
mounted in PIM0.

DAIA0

DAIA1

DAIA5

CONDITIONS

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

REMARKS

One DAIA card is


provided.

ON

OFF

The clock signal is sent


to PLO0 of MP card via
supply route 0
(DAIA0).

Two or three
DAIA cards are
provided.

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

380

OFF The clock signal supply


route is automatically
changed to the route 1
(DAIA1), if a transmission line failure occurs
on the supply route 0.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIB (DAIB)

PN-DAIB (DAIB)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
BL

SW1
SW2

BUS

SW3

JPS
JPR
CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LINK

Green

Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.

RED

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment


signal loss.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.

LOOP

Not used

BL

Red

Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).


Flashes while FP data downloading.

381

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIB (DAIB)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SENSE
(Rotary SW)

FUNCTION

CHECK

Always set to 0

0-F

MB (Toggle SW)

1-F

Not used

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 1
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON

For normal operation

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF


Continued on next page

382

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIB (DAIB)

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48 Kbps

OFF

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64 Kbps

ON

DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi


Frame

OFF

DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi


Frame

ON

Line code: AMI with ZCS

OFF

Line code: B8ZS

ON

Setting of control signal time slot

CHECK

ON
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FUNCTION

SWITCH NUMBER

4
OFF
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
8
OFF

4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

6
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

TIME SLOT
NUMBER
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS23

NOTE 2: The time slot number 0, 20,


21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/22)
cannot be used for control
signal.
NOTE 3: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAIA card.
Continued on next page

383

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIB (DAIB)

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW3 (Dip SW)


ON

1 2 3 4

ON
1
OFF
ON
2

FUNCTION
Set the equalizer according to the cable
length between the system and the
CSU.
SW
3-1

SW
3-2

SW
3-3

ON

ON

ON

0 - 40 m
(0-131.2 ft.)

ON

ON

OFF

40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)

ON

OFF

ON

80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)

ON

OFF

OFF

120 - 160 m
(394-525 ft.)

OFF

ON

ON

160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)

OFF

OFF

OFF

Signal is not sent

OFF
ON

3
OFF

4
JPS (Jumper pin)

JPR (Jumper pin)

CHECK

CABLE
LENGTH

OFF

Always set to OFF

UP

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is not provided.

UP

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is not provided.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

384

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIC (DAIC)

PN-DAIC (DAIC)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL

SW2
SW1

TBUS

SW3
RBUS

CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LINK

Green

Remains lit when the following connection are normal.


Control channel link between the DAIA card and DAIB card.
Connection between the opposite DAIC card.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.

RED

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment signal loss.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.

LOOP

Not used

PWR

Not used

BL

Not used

385

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIC (DAIC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

4
3
2
1

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Not used

ON

DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi


Frame

OFF

DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi


Frame

ON

Line code: AMI with ZCS

OFF

Line code: B8ZS

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

For normal operation

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Continued on next page

386

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIC (DAIC)

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW3 (Dip SW)


ON

ON
1

1 2 3 4

OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON

3
OFF

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the equalizer according to the cable


length between the system and the
CSU.
SW
3-1

SW
3-2

SW
3-3

CABLE
LENGTH

ON

ON

ON

0 - 40 m
(0-131.2 ft.)

ON

ON

OFF

40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)

ON

OFF

ON

80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)

ON

OFF

OFF

120 - 160 m
(394-525 ft.)

OFF

ON

ON

160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)

OFF

OFF

OFF

Signal is not sent

ON

When mounting this card on Remote


Site.

OFF

When mounting this card on Main Site.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:

When the power is on, flip MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

387

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAID-A (DAID)

PN-DAID-A (DAID)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL

SW1

BUS

SW2
SW3

PCM1
PCM0
SRT

E1Z

JPR

JP

JPS
CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LINK

Green

Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.

LOOP

Not used

PWR

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

BL

Red

Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).


Flashes while FP data downloading.

388

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAID-A (DAID)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SENSE
(Rotary SW)

CHECK

FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the DAID


card.
By this setting, the system regards the DAID card and
the opposite DAIE card as one Firmware Processor.

0
1
2
3

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

SW1-4: ON
0-F

MB (Toggle SW)

SW1-4: OFF
FP No. 16

FP No. 01

FP No. 17

FP No. 02

FP No. 18

FP No. 03

FP No. 19

4-F

Not used

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

1
NOTE 3

ON

For supplying 2.0 MHz clock to


PLO0

OFF

No clock supply to PLO0

ON

For supplying 2.0 MHz clock to


PLO1

OFF

No clock supply to PLO1

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

FP No.01-03

OFF

FP No.16-19

OFF
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 3
ON

3
4

For normal operation

Continued on next page

389

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAID-A (DAID)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

CHECK

ON

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48 Kbps

OFF

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64 Kbps

ON

CRC Synchronization Detection Timer


is provided.

OFF

CRC Synchronization Detection Timer


is not provided.

ON

CRC4 Check is provided.

OFF

CRC4 Check is not provided.

1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FUNCTION

3
Continued on next page

390

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAID-A (DAID)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
4

ON

ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON

OFF
8

CHECK

Setting of control signal time slot


SWITCH NUMBER

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FUNCTION

4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

6
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

TIME SLOT
NUMBER
TS 1
TS 2
TS 3
TS 4
TS 5
TS 6
TS 7
TS 8
TS 9
TS 10
TS 11
TS 12
TS 13
TS 14
TS 15
TS 16
TS 17
TS 18
TS 19
TS 20
TS 21
TS 22
TS 23
TS 24
TS 25
TS 26
TS 27
TS 29
TS 30
TS 31

NOTE 4: The time slot number 0 and


28 (TS0/28) cannot be used
for control signal.
NOTE 5: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAIE card.
Continued on next page

391

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAID-A (DAID)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON

1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1

ON

Always set to ON

ON

Always set to ON

ON

Always set to ON

ON

FP No.16

OFF

FP No.01-03, 17-19

4
JPS (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
LEFT

JPR (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
LEFT

E1Z (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
LEFT

SRT (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
LEFT

JP (Jumper pin)

FUNCTION

UP
DOWN

CHECK

Balanced transmission: 120


(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 (For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission: 120
(For twisted-pair cable)
RA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 (For coaxial cable)
Line impedance:
120 (For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
75 (For coaxial cable)
For mounting this card on PIM0
For mounting this card on PIM1-PIM7
Line impedance:
120 (For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
75 (For coaxial cable)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

392

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAID-A (DAID)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When source clock signal is supplied via the line between the Main Site and the Remote Site, set
the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAID cards (DAID0, DAID1) must
be mounted in PIM0.

DAID0

DAID1

DAID5

CONDITIONS

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

REMARKS

One DAID card is


provided.

ON

OFF

The clock signal is sent


to PLO0 of MP card via
supply route 0
(DAID0).

Two or three
DAID cards are
provided.

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

393

OFF The clock signal supply


route is automatically
changed to the route 1
(DAID1), if a transmission line failure occurs
on the supply route 0.

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIE (DAIE)

PN-DAIE (DAIE)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
BL
SW1
BUS

SW2
SW3

JP

E1Z

JPR

JPS

CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LINK

Green

Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.

LOOP

Not used

BL

Red

Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).


Remains lit while FP data downloading.

394

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIE (DAIE)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SENSE
(Rotary SW)

FUNCTION

CHECK

Always set to 0

0-F

MB (Toggle SW)

1-F

Not used

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 1
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48 Kbps

OFF

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64 Kbps

ON

CRC Synchronization Detection Timer


is provided.

OFF

CRC Synchronization Detection Timer


is not provided.

ON

CRC4 Check is provided.

OFF

CRC4 Check is not provided.

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

For normal operation

1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Continued on next page

395

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIE (DAIE)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)

ON
4

ON

ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON

OFF
8

CHECK

Setting of control signal time slot


SWITCH NUMBER

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FUNCTION

4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

6
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

TIME SLOT
NUMBER
TS 1
TS 2
TS 3
TS 4
TS 5
TS 6
TS 7
TS 8
TS 9
TS 10
TS 11
TS 12
TS 13
TS 14
TS 15
TS 16
TS 17
TS 18
TS 19
TS 20
TS 21
TS 22
TS 23
TS 24
TS 25
TS 26
TS 27
TS 29
TS 30
TS 31

NOTE 2: The time slot number 0 and


28 (TS0/28) cannot be used
for control signal.
NOTE 3: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAID card.
Continued on next page

396

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIE (DAIE)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON

1 2 3 4

JPS (Jumper pin)

JPR (Jumper pin)

E1Z (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1

ON

Always set to ON

ON

Always set to ON

ON

Always set to ON

OFF

Always set to OFF

CHECK

RIGHT

Balanced transmission: 120 (For


twisted-pair cable)

LEFT

TA is grounded on the transmission


line: 75 (For coaxial cable)

RIGHT

RA is grounded on the transmission


line: 75 (For coaxial cable)

LEFT

Balanced transmission: 120 (For


twisted-pair cable)

RIGHT

Line impedance: 75 (For coaxial


cable)

LEFT
SRT (Jumper pin)

FUNCTION

RIGHT

LEFT

Line impedance:
120 (For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
75 (For coaxial cable)
Line impedance:
120 (For twisted-pair cable)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

397

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIF (DAIF)

PN-DAIF (DAIF)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL

SW2
SW1

TBUS
SW3
JPS

RBUS
JP

JPR
CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LINK

Green

Remains lit when the following connection are normal.


Control channel link between the DAID card and DAIE card.
Connection between the opposite DAIF card.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.

LOOP

Not used

PWR

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.


(Only on the DAIF card mounted on the Main Site.)

BL

Not used

398

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIF (DAIF)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)

OFF

Line impedance: 120


(For twisted-pair cable)

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

4
3
2
1
ON

For normal operation

Continued on next page

399

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIF (DAIF)

SWITCH
NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48 Kbps

OFF

Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64 Kbps

ON

CRC Synchronization Detection Timer


is provided.

OFF

CRC Synchronization Detection Timer


is not provided.

ON

CRC4 Check is provided.

OFF

CRC4 Check is not provided.

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

Continued on next page

400

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DAIF (DAIF)

SWITCH
NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

Always set to ON

ON

Always set to ON

ON

Always set to ON

ON

When mounting this card on Remote


Site.

OFF

When mounting this card on Main Site.

1 2 3 4

4
JPS (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
LEFT

JPR (Jumper pin)

RIGHT
LEFT

JP (Jumper pin)

UP
DOWN

TA is grounded on the transmission


line: 75 (For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission: 120
(For twisted-pair cable)
RA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 (For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission: 120
(For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
75 (For coaxial cable)
Line impedance:
120 (For twisted-pair cable)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:

When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

401

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
SW3

MB
SW1

SW2

JP3
JP2

JPRI

JP1

JPR

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

JPT

402

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when loopback test is in progress.

PCM

Not used

MFRM

Not used

FRM

Not used

MRMT

Not used

RMT

Not used

CRC

Not used

AIS

Not used

BL

Not used

403

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

ON

Local loopback

OFF

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

4
ON

SW2
(Piano Key SW)

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1-3, 5-8

ON

Continued on next page

404

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

Always set to ON

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON
5
OFF

CHECK

Common channel signaling data


transmission speed (For Digital Interface)

ON
6
OFF

TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
3-5

SW
3-6

48 Kbps (1) NOTE 3

OFF

ON

48 Kbps (2) NOTE 3

OFF

OFF

56 Kbps

ON

OFF

64 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

JP1 (Jumper pin)


RIGHT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

RIGHT

Not used

JP2 (Jumper pin)

JP3 (Jumper pin)

Continued on next page

405

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

JPRI (Jumper pin)


LEFT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

LEFT

Not used

JPR (Jumper pin)

JPT (Jumper pin)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW3-6: ON

SW3-6: OFF

48 Kbps (1)
1

48 Kbps (2)
1

Data

1
Data

406

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
SW3

RUN
MB
SW1

SW2

JP3

JPRI

JP2

JPR
JPT

JP1

407

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel (CCT)/D channel (DTI/PRT) data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time


slot 16 (Only for E1).

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office (Only for E1).

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors


(Only for T1).

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy


: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy

408

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

NOTE 1
NOTE 8

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

4
3
2
1

[North America only]

ON

NOTE 3

For normal operation

ON

DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)

OFF

DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]

4
NOTE 8

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

409

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW2
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

ON

3
NOTE 6
4
NOTE 6

FUNCTION

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON
5
NOTE 6
OFF

Set equalizer according to the cable


length between the PBX and the C.O.
or CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
6
NOTE 6
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
7
NOTE 6
OFF
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )

1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)


599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan


(SW1-3 OFF)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7

CHECK

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 )

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)


40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

410

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW3
(Dip SW)

OFF

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

T1 mode

OFF

E1 mode

ON

PRT/CCT mode

OFF

DTI mode

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

Common channel signaling data transmission speed (For Digital Interface)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5
OFF
ON
6
OFF

TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
3-5

SW
3-6

48 Kbps (1) NOTE 7

OFF

ON

48 Kbps (2) NOTE 7

OFF

OFF

56 Kbps

ON

OFF

64 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used
Continued on next page

411

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH NAME
JP1 (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT

JP2 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the line impedance.


JP1

JP2

LINE IMPEDANCE

LEFT

RIGHT

100 (for T1)

LEFT

LEFT

110 (for T1)

RIGHT

RIGHT

120 (for E1)

RIGHT

LEFT

75 (for E1)

LEFT
JP3 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

Balanced transmission
(For twisted-paire cable) (for T1/E1)

LEFT

Unbalanced transmission
(For coaxial cable) (for E1)

LEFT

Not used

JPRI (Jumper pin)

JPR (Jumper pin)

JPT (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is provided.

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is not provided.

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is provided.

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is not provided.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW2-1 and SW2-2 on all the CCT/DTI/PRT cards
mounted in PIM0 to OFF.
Continued on next page

412

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

NOTE 4: Set SW2-1 and SW2-2 as follows:

CONDITIONS

When one CCT/DTI/


PRT is provided.

When more than one


CCT/DTI/PRT is
provided.

CCT/DTI/PRT0

CCT/DTI/PRT1

CCT/DTI/PRT2

SW
2-1

SW
2-1

SW
2-1

SW
2-2

ON

OFF

ON

SW
2-2

OFF OFF

ON

SW
2-2

CCT/DTI/PRT7
SW
2-1

SW
2-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock
signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the clock


signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occurs
with CCT/DTI/PRT0, MP card
will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets clock
from CCT/DTI/PRT1.

OFF OFF

NOTE 5: Mount the CCT/DTI/PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: This card must be reset after the SW2-3 to SW2-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.
NOTE 7: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW3-6: ON

SW3-6: OFF

48 Kbps (1)
1

48 Kbps (2)
1

Data

1
Data

NOTE 8: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
[Series 3800 software or later required]

413

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
SW3

RUN
MB
SW1

SW2

JP3

JPRI

JP2

JPR
JPT

JP1

414

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
CRC
AIS
BL

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel (CCT)/D channel (DTI/PRT) data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time


slot 16 (Only for E1).

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office (Only for E1).

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors


(Only for T1).

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy


: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy

415

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

NOTE 1
NOTE 2

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 3
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

4
3
2
1

[North America only]

ON

NOTE 4

For normal operation

ON

DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)

OFF

DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]

4
NOTE 2

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

416

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW2
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 4
NOTE 5

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 4
NOTE 5

ON

3
NOTE 7
4
NOTE 7

FUNCTION

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON
5
NOTE 7
OFF

Set equalizer according to the cable


length between the PBX and the C.O.
or CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
6
NOTE 7
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
7
NOTE 7
OFF
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )

1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)


599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan


(SW1-3 OFF)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7

CHECK

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 )

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)


40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

417

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW3
(Dip SW)

OFF

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

T1 mode

OFF

E1 mode

ON

PRT/CCT mode

OFF

DTI mode

ON

A-law/u-law conversion (For Taiwan)


NOTE 8,NOTE 9

OFF

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Common channel signaling data transmission speed (For Digital Interface)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5
OFF
ON
6

TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
3-5

SW
3-6

48 Kbps (1) NOTE 10

OFF

ON

48 Kbps (2) NOTE 10

OFF

OFF

56 Kbps

ON

OFF

64 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF
7

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used
Continued on next page

418

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH NAME
JP1 (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT

JP2 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the line impedance.


JP1

JP2

LINE IMPEDANCE

LEFT

RIGHT

100 (for T1)

LEFT

LEFT

110 (for T1)

RIGHT

RIGHT

120 (for E1)

RIGHT

LEFT

75 (for E1)

LEFT
JP3 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

Balanced transmission
(For twisted-paire cable) (for T1/E1)

LEFT

Unbalanced transmission
(For coaxial cable) (for E1)

LEFT

Not used

JPRI (Jumper pin)

JPR (Jumper pin)

JPT (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is provided.

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is not provided.

RIGHT

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is provided.

LEFT

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is not provided.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
[Series 3800 software or later required]
NOTE 3: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page
419

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW2-1 and SW2-2 on all the CCT/DTI/PRT cards
mounted in PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: Set SW2-1 and SW2-2 as follows:

CONDITIONS

When one CCT/DTI/


PRT is provided.

When more than one


CCT/DTI/PRT is
provided.

CCT/DTI/PRT0

CCT/DTI/PRT1

CCT/DTI/PRT2

SW
2-1

SW
2-1

SW
2-1

ON

ON

SW
2-2
OFF

SW
2-2

OFF OFF

ON

SW
2-2

CCT/DTI/PRT7
SW
2-1

SW
2-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock
signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the clock


signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure occurs
with CCT/DTI/PRT0, MP card
will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets clock
from CCT/DTI/PRT1.

OFF OFF

NOTE 6: Mount the CCT/DTI/PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 7: This card must be reset after the SW2-3 to SW2-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.
NOTE 8: This switch setting is required when providing A-law/u-law conversion for CCT/DTI/PRT in
Taiwan. And for PRT, A-law/u-law setting by CMAAY=17 is required in addition to the switch
setting (Setting SW3-3 to ON).
NOTE 9: To provide A-law/u-law conversion for CCT/DTI/PRT, the following firmware program and
MP program are required.
Firmware program
MP program
CCT

SC-3729 IPS CCHDA PROG-B1 or later

No limitation

DTI

SC-3712 IPS PRTDA PROG-B1 or later

No limitation

PRT (PRI)

SC-3712 IPS PRTDA PROG-B1 or later

Series 3900 or later

PRT (Q-SIG) SC-3728 IPS PRTDB PROG-B1 or later

No limitaion

NOTE 10:The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW3-6: OFF

SW3-6: ON
48 Kbps (1)
1

48 Kbps (2)
1

Data

1
Data

420

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MAS

MB
SW1

JP1
SW0
AISS
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL

JPR0
JPS
JRR1

421

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received. The distant


office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy


: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

0-3

F
4

FUNCTION

UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation


Continued on next page

422

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

ON

3
NOTE 6
4
NOTE 6

FUNCTION

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON
5
NOTE 6
OFF

Set equalizer according to the cable


length between the PBX and the C.O.
or CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
6
NOTE 6
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
7
NOTE 6
OFF
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )

1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)


599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan


(SW1-3 OFF)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

CHECK

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 )

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)


40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

423

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

4
3
2
1

CHECK

[North America only]

ON

NOTE 4

ON

DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)

OFF

DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

UP

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is not provided.

RIGHT

Line impedance: 100

LEFT

Line impedance: 110

4
JPR0 (Jumper pin)

JPR1 (Jumper pin)

JPS (Jumper pin)

UP

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is not provided.
Continued on next page

424

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

MAS (Jumper pin)


DOWN

AISS (Jumper pin)

Always set to DOWN

UP

AIS signal is sent out when make-busy


or power on.

DOWN

AIS signal is not sent out when makebusy or power on.

JP1 (Jumper pin)


LEFT

Always set to LEFT

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

425

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
DTI0
CONDITIONS

When one DTI is


provided.

When more than one


DTI is provided.

SW
0-1
ON

ON

SW
0-2
OFF

DTI1
SW
0-1

OFF OFF

DTI2

SW
0-2

ON

SW
0-1

SW
0-2

OFF OFF

DTI7
SW
0-1

SW
0-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock
signal from DTI0 at its PLO0
input.

MP card will receive the clock


signal from DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal conditions.
Should a clock failure occurs
OFF OFF
with DTI0, MP card will automatically switch to the PLO1
input which gets clock from
DTI1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the DTI cards mounted
in PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.

426

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW

PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL

JP1

JPS
JPR
JP

427

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time


slot 16.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive 1 is being


received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy


: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 to 10 channels are busy

428

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

AP No.

FUNCTION

SW-8: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW-8: OFF

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation


Continued on next page

429

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

ON

3
4

CHECK

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Transmission line cable:


Coaxial cable (75 )

OFF

Transmission line cable:


Twisted-pair cable (120 )

OFF

OFF

FUNCTION

Not used (Always set to OFF)

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

430

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT

LEFT
JPR
(Jumper pin)

JP
(Jumper pin)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission line
(For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)

DOWN

RA is grounded on the transmission line


(For coaxial cable)

RIGHT

Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)

LEFT

Line impedance: 120


(For twisted-pair cable)

JP1
(Jumper pin)
DOWN

Always set to DOWN

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

431

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

NOTE 3: Set the SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:


DTI0
CONDITIONS

When one DTI is


provided.

When more than


one DTI is
provided.

DTI1

DTI2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

DTI7
SW SW
-1 -2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from DTI0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the


clock signal from DTI0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure
occurs with DTI0, MP card
will automatically switch to
the PLO1 input which gets
from DTI1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in
PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

432

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-8ETIA (HUB)

PN-8ETIA (HUB)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
PN-8ETIA
PZ-M675

D4
S2

10/100
LINK/ACT
10/100
LINK/ACT
10/100
LINK/ACT
10 /100
LINK/ACT

J12

LAN 7/8
LAN 5/6
To LAN
LAN 3/4
LAN 1/2

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

D4

Green

ON
OFF

: Operating power is ON.


: Operating power is OFF.

LINK/ACT

Green

Lights : LAN link pulse is detected.


Flashes : LAN data is transferred and received.

10/100

Green

ON
OFF

: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.


: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

433

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-8ETIA (HUB)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME
S2
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON

Auto MDI/MDI-X OFF


(MDI-X fixed)

OFF

Auto MDI/MDI-X ON
(MDI/MDI-X automatic change)

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON
4
3
2
1
OFF

FUNCTION

CHECK

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

434

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

PN-2ILCC (ILC)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
SW2
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
PFA1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
PFA0
SW1

SW0

435

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

B21

Red

No.1 Circuit

B11

D1

Red

Green

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

ALM1

Red

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

PFA1

Red

Power supply status


ON:
Power failure
OFF:
Normal operation
Continued on next page

436

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

LAMP
NAME
B20

B10

D0

COLOR
Red

Red

Green

FUNCTION
No.0 Circuit

B2 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

B1 channel status
ON:
OFF:
Flash (60 IPM):

Busy
Idle
Make Busy

D channel status
ON:
OFF:

Link is connected
Link is not connected

ALM0

Red

Transmission line fault status


ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation

PFA0

Red

Power supply status


ON:
Power failure
OFF:
Normal operation

437

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.
SW4-8: ON

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

SW4-8: OFF

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4

SW No.

NOTE 1

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW2 (Piano SW)

ON

Remote loopback (No.0 Circuit)

OFF

Normal operation

ON

Remote loopback (No.1 Circuit)

OFF

Normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

ON

For normal operation

Continued on next page

438

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW0 (Dip SW)


ON

CHECK

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.0
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the transmitting side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.1
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

ON

For terminating the receiving side of


channels B1 and B2 with 100 . (No.1
Circuit)

OFF

To remove the terminating resistor on


the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

1 2

SW1 (Dip SW)


ON

FUNCTION

1 2

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

439

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-8IPTA (SIP)

PN-8IPTA (SIP)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

DC_CONN

SENS
PZ-24IPLA
NOTE

RUN
MB

SW0
BUSY
DC
L1
L0
LINK
100M
ACT

LAN
RS

NOTE:

Order the PZ-24IPLA card separately.

440

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

PN-8IPTA (SIP)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flash (240 IPM): Initializing this card.


Flash (120 IPM): Normal operation.
OFF:
Idle/Make Busy.

BUSY

Red

ON:
All channels are busy.
Flash (120 IPM): One or more channels are busy (except for a case
where all channels are busy).
OFF:
All channels are idle.

DC

Green

ON:
OFF:

PZ-24IPLA card already mounted is operating.


PZ-24IPLA card is not mounted.

L0

Red

ON:

Disconnection of a link with the IP network has been


detected.

L1

Not used

LINK

Green

ON:
OFF:

Connected to the IP network.


Not connected to the IP network.

100M

Green

ON:
OFF:

Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.


Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

ACT

Green

ON:
OFF:

Data is sending/receiving to the IP network.


Data is not sending/receiving to the IP network.

441

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-8IPTA (SIP)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW0-4: ON

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

04

UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

442

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-8IPTA (SIP)

SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

CHECK

ON

Not used

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Auto Negotiation OFF


(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed)

OFF

Auto Negotiation ON
(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

OFF
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

2
ON

3
NOTE 3

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 3: When using the firmware program of SC-3591 IPS IPTT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPTA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firmware program of SC-3249 IPS IPTT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPTA card, Auto Negotiation function is always set to ON.

443

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-IPTB (IPT)

PN-IPTB (IPT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
PZ-M567

PN-IPTB

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW1
LINK
TXRX
COL
100M

VCTA

BUSY
SUBOPE3
SUBOPE2
SUBOPE1
SUBOPE0
L3
L2
L1
LYR

VCTA
To 4VCT Card

VCT
VCT
SW2

IP
CONN

IP CONN : To External
LAN Interface

MODE

444

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-IPTB (IPT)

Lamp Indications
PN-IPTB

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

BUSY

Red

ON: At least one line is busy.


OFF: All lines are idle.

SUBOPE3

Green

Remains lit when Card No.3 of 4VCT is operating.

SUBOPE2

Green

Remains lit when Card No.2 of 4VCT is operating.

SUBOPE1

Green

Remains lit when Card No.1 of 4VCT is operating.

SUBOPE0

Green

Remains lit when Card No.0 of 4VCT is operating.

L3

Not used

L2

Green

Remains lit when this card successfully has been registered at the
H.323 gatekeeper. Before the L2 lights, the led is winking.

L1

Green

Remains lit while the line can be used.

LYR

Green

Remains lit when IP network is ready to use.

PZ-M567

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

LINK

Green

ON: Connected to the IP network.


OFF: Not connected to the IP network.

TXRX

Green

Remains lit when sending or receiving IP data.

COL

Green

Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.

100M

Green

ON: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.


OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

445

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-IPTB (IPT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: ON

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)

04

UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
MODE
(Rotary SW)

Auto Negotiation ON NOTE 3

Auto Negotiation OFF


(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps change
by SW2-1) NOTE 3

0, 1

2-F

For normal operation

Not used

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When you set the MODE switch of the IPT card to 0 (Auto Negotiation On), the communication
mode (Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex) and the communication speed (Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps)
of the Ethernet are adjusted to the switching HUB automatically. When you set the MODE
switch to 1 (Auto Negotiation Off), the communication mode of the Ethernet will be fixed to
Half-Duplex. And the communication speed will be set by SW2-1.
Continued on next page

446

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-IPTB (IPT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1 (Dip SW)


1
ON

1 2 3 4

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

ON

Ethernet 100 Mbps

NOTE 4

OFF

Ethernet 10 Mbps

NOTE 4

OFF

Not used

ON

Dynamic Jitter Buffer

OFF

Static Jitter Buffer

ON

Nonlinear processor for echo canceller


is not used.

OFF

Nonlinear processor for echo canceller


is used.

4
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2-5, 7

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 4: These switch settings are valid only when MODE switch (Rotary SW) is set to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF).

447

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

PN-24PRTA (PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MAS

MB
SW1

JP1
SW0
AISS

SW2

JPR0

LC
LPB
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL

JPS
JRR1

448

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D


channel data links connected.

LPB

Not used

CRC

Red

Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)


errors.

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received.


The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy


: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

NOTE 1
NOTE 6

CHECK

0-3

Not used

4-F

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

AP No.

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

Continued on next page

449

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)

1
NOTE 3

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 3

ON

3
NOTE 5
4
NOTE 5

For normal operation

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation


Continued on next page

450

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON
5
NOTE 5
OFF

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

ON
6
NOTE 5
OFF
ON

FUNCTION
Set equalizer according to the cable
length between the PBX and the C.O. or
CSU.
For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

7
NOTE 5
OFF
8

OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 )

1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)


599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
Not used
Signal is not sent

For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan


(SW1-3 OFF)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

ON

CHECK

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 )

0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)


40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

451

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON

DTI mode

OFF

PRT mode

OFF

Not used

CHECK

OFF
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

[North America only]


ON

ON

DS-1
(T1 with CSU function)

OFF

DSX-1
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]

4
NOTE 6

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

452

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1

OFF

FUNCTION

CHECK

Always set to OFF

[North America only for AT&T]


ON

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ON

Deletion of Area Code on


International Outgoing call

OFF

No deletion of Area Code on


International Outgoing call

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]
OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF


Continued on next page

453

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
JPR0 (Jumper pin)

JPR1 (Jumper pin)

JPS (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

UP

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the receiving line


is not provided.

RIGHT

Line impedance: 100

LEFT

Line impedance: 110

UP

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is provided.

DOWN

Neutral grounding on the transmitting


line is not provided.

DOWN

Always set to DOWN

MAS (Jumper pin)

AISS (Jumper pin)

UP

AIS signal is sent out when make-busy


or power on.

DOWN

AIS signal is not sent out when makebusy or power on.

JP1 (Jumper pin)


LEFT

Always set to LEFT

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
Continued on next page

454

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
PRT0
CONDITIONS

When one PRT


is provided.

When more than


one PRT is provided.

PRT1

PRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2

ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

PRT7
SW SW
0-1 0-2

REMARKS

MP card will receive the


clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the


clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
Should a clock failure
OFF OFF
occurs with PRT0, MP
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
PRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 5: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.
NOTE 6: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
[Series 3800 software or later required]

455

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

PN-30PRTA (PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW

JP1

JPS

SW1

LC
LPB
PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL

JPR
JP

456

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D


channel data links connected.

LPB

Not used

PCM

Red

Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.

FRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.

MFRM

Red

Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time


slot 16.

RMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.

MRMT

Red

Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.

AIS

Red

Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive 1 is being


received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.

BL

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)

: More than 10 channels are busy


: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 to 10 channels are busy

457

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

SW-8: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW-8: OFF

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

SW No.

NOTE 1
NOTE 5

0-3

MB (Toggle SW)

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

AP No.

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

NOTE 2

DOWN

For normal operation


Continued on next page

458

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3

OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
NOTE 3

ON

3
4

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.

ON

Remote loopback

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Local loopback (AIS send)

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Transmission line cable:


Coaxial cable (75 )

OFF

Transmission line cable:


Twisted-pair cable (120 )

OFF

OFF

8
NOTE 5

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

Not used (Always set to OFF)

Continued on next page

459

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH
NAME
SW1 (Dip SW)

ON

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

CHECK

Continued on next page

460

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT

LEFT
JPR
(Jumper pin)

JP
(Jumper pin)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission line
(For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)

DOWN

RA is grounded on the transmission line


(For coaxial cable)

RIGHT

Line impedance: 75
(For coaxial cable)

LEFT

Line impedance: 120


(For twisted-pair cable)

JP1 (Jumper pin)


DOWN

Always set to DOWN

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

461

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

NOTE 3: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:


PRT0
CONDITIONS

When one PRT is


provided.

When more than


one PRT is
provided.

PRT1

PRT2

SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

PRT7
SW SW
-1 -2

REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input.

MP card will receive the


clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
Should a clock failure
OFF OFF
occurs with PRT0, MP
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
PRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 5: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
[Series 3800 software or later required]

462

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-4RSTB (MFR)

PN-4RSTB (MFR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENS
RUN
MB

SW
OPE3
OPE2
OPE1
OPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

OPE0-3

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

463

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4RSTB (MFR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05

AP No.

FUNCTION

SW-8: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW-8: OFF

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW
(Piano Key SW)

OFF

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

3
4
ON

ON

For make-busy No. 0 circuit

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For make-busy No. 1 circuit

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For make-busy No. 2 circuit

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For make-busy No. 3 circuit

OFF

For normal operation

OFF

OFF

OFF

For normal operation

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

464

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)

PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW1
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
JP0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

BL0-3

Red

Remains lit when receiving a CALLER ID (CLASS SM) signal.

465

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

NOTE 1
NOTE 3

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be


set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No.

FUNCTION

0-3

MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

1
2

4
3
2
1

3
ON

4
JP0

(Jumper pin)

For normal operation

ON

For make-busy No. 0 circuit

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For make-busy No. 1 circuit

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For make-busy No. 2 circuit

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For make-busy No. 3 circuit

OFF

For normal operation

RIGHT

For normal operation

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.


NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When accommodating the CIR card (PN-4RSTC-A) on Remote site, be sure to set SENSE switch
of all the CIR cards to AP Number 15. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each CIR card. If a different site is used to accommodate the CIR card, be sure to set
SENSE switch to switch No. 15.
[Series 3800 software or later required]

466

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-SC00 (CCH)

PN-SC00 (CCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW1

SENS
RUN
MB

SW0
LC
LPB

RS

To Modem
( For Analog Interface)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signaling channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Remains lit when a loopback test is in progress.

467

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-SC00 (CCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

AP No.

FUNCTION

SW0-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)

OFF

4
3
2
1
ON

ON

Loopback test

OFF

For normal operation

ON

Analog interface

OFF

Digital interface

ON

RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM) ON


NOTE 3

OFF

RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM)


OFF

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

For normal operation

Continued on next page

468

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-SC00 (CCH)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1 (Dip SW)

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

OFF
ON

TRANSMISSION
SPEED

SW
1-1

SW
1-2

SW
1-3

SW
1-4

SW
1-5

48 Kbps NOTE 4

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

48 Kbps NOTE 4

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

56 Kbps

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

64 Kbps

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Common channel signaling data


transmission speed (For Analog Interface)

ON

OFF
ON

CHECK

Common channel signaling data


transmission speed (For Digital Interface)

ON

1
ON

FUNCTION

Set switches (SW1-1 - SW1-5) to


OFF.

OFF

OFF

Not used

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: This setting is available when SW0-2 is set to ON (Analog Interface).
NOTE 4: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
SW1-3: OFF

SW1-3: ON

48 Kbps
1

48 Kbps
1

Data

1
Data

469

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-SC01 (DCH)

PN-SC01 (DCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW1

SENS
RUN
MB

SW0
LC
LPB

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

LC

Green

Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D


channel data links connected.

LPB

Green

Not used

470

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-SC01 (DCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

AP No.

SW0-4: ON

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE 1

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

F
4

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

For normal operation

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
ON

Continued on next page

471

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-SC01 (DCH)

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

SW1 (Dip SW)

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHECK

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

472

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH)

PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW1
DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

DOPE7-0

Green

Remains lit when D channel link with CSI card is connected.


CSI Card No.

Circuit No.

DOPE7

CSI3

No.1

DOPE6

CSI3

No.0

DOPE5

CSI2

No.1

DOPE4

CSI2

No.0

DOPE3

CSI1

No.1

DOPE2

CSI1

No.0

DOPE1

CSI0

No.1

DOPE0

CSI0

No.0

473

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

SW1-4: ON

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE 1

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

AP No.

FUNCTION

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

For normal operation

1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4

ON

60 ms synchronization clock ON

OFF

60 ms synchronization clock OFF

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

ON

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the U-interface CS (ZT) is used, one CSH card per system must be set to the SW1-1 switch
ON. And mount the CSH card which SW1-1 is set to ON into PIM0.
NOTE 4: When the S-interface CS (ZT) is used, set the SW1-1 switch to OFF.

474

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-SC03-B (ICH)

PN-SC03-B (ICH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW1
DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.

DOPE7

Green

Remains lit when No. 7 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE6

Green

Remains lit when No. 6 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE5

Green

Remains lit when No. 5 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE4

Green

Remains lit when No. 4 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE3

Green

Remains lit when No. 3 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE2

Green

Remains lit when No. 2 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE1

Green

Remains lit when No. 1 circuit D channel link is connected.

DOPE0

Green

Remains lit when No. 0 circuit D channel link is connected.

475

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PN-SC03-B (ICH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F

SW1-4: ON

0-3
MB (Toggle SW)

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE 1

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be


set by CM05.

AP No.

FUNCTION

Not used
UP

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

AP No. 04-15

OFF

AP No. 20-31

4
ON

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

476

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
FACE

SW

REAR

CONNR

CONNR: To CONN connector on


PN-AP00-B (AP00)

477

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW (Dip SW)
ON

1 2 3 4

FUNCTION

ON

For normal operation


(Battery backup ON)

OFF

Not used
(Battery backup OFF)

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

CHECK

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

478

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

Mounting PZ-M537 Card


When mounting the EXPMEM card on the AP00 card, do the following procedure.
STEP1: Take off three screws from the rear side of EXPMEM support.
NOTE: Supports and screws are attached to the EXPMEM card.
STEP2: Connect the CONNR connector on the EXPMEM card and the CONN connector on the AP00
card.
STEP3: Secure the EXPMEM card to the AP00 card with three screws which have been taken off by
STEP1.

Mounting EXPMEM Card on AP00 Card

SUPPORT

EXPMEM CARD

CONNR CONNECTOR
EXPMEM CARD

AP00 CARD

CONN CONNECTOR

479

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

PZ-M542 (CONN)

PZ-M542 (CONN)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

RCV21

JP1

To Champ
Connector (MDF)

LTC

JP2

TRS21

FOR
No.1
CIRCUIT

RCV11
LT

TRS01

JP0

RCV01

TRS11

FOR
No.2
CIRCUIT

To LTC Connector
on BWB in PIM

FOR
No.0
CIRCUIT

COAXIAL CONNECTOR

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

480

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PZ-M542 (CONN)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
JP0

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT

JP1

RIGHT
LEFT

JP2

RIGHT
LEFT

FUNCTION

CHECK

For coaxial connectors


(No.0 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.0 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.1 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.2 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.2 circuit)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

481

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PZ-M557 (CONN)

PZ-M557 (CONN)

JP2

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

FOR
No.2
CIRCUIT

TRS20

RCV10

JP1
JP0

LTC

TRS10
To Champ
Connector (MDF)

RCV20

FOR
No.0
CIRCUIT

RCV00

FOR
No.1
CIRCUIT

LT

To LTC Connector
on BWB in PIM

TRS00

COAXIAL CONNECTOR

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

482

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

PZ-M557 (CONN)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
JP0

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT

JP1

RIGHT
LEFT

JP2

RIGHT
LEFT

FUNCTION

CHECK

For coaxial connectors


(No.0 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.0 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.1 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.2 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.2 circuit)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

483

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3003.fm

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


LINE/TRUNK CARD

LINE/TRUNK CARD
The table below shows the line/trunk cards to be explained in this section.

List of Line/Trunk Cards

NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)

LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED

REFERENCE
PAGE

PN-2AMPA (AMP)

Page 488

PN-CFTA (CFT)

Page 489

PN-CFTB (CFT)

Page 490

PN-2COTD (COT)

Page 491

PN-2COTE (COT)

Page 492

PN-4COTA-A
(COT)

Page 493

PN-4COTB (COT)

Page 494

PN-4COTE (COT)

Page 495

PN-4COTF (COT)

Page 496

PN-4COTG (COT)

Page 497

PN-6COTJ (COT)

Page 498

PN-8COTH (COT)

Page 499

PN-8COTQ (COT)

Page 500

PN-8COTR (COT)

Page 501

PN-8COTS (COT)

Page 502

PN-8COTT (COT)

Page 503

PN-8COTU (COT)

Page 504

PN-2CSIA (CSI)

Page 505

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

Page 508
Continued on next page

*MB = Make Busy

484

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


LINE/TRUNK CARD

List of Line/Trunk Cards

NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)

LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED

REFERENCE
PAGE

PN-2CSIH (CSI)

Page 511

PN-4CSIA (CSI)

Page 514

PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)

Page 517

PN-4DATC (DAT)

Page 520

PN-4DIDA (DIT)

Page 521

PN-2DITA (DIT)

Page 522

PN-4DITB (DIT)

Page 523

PN-DK00 (DK)

Page 524

PN-2DLCN (DLC)

Page 525

PN-4DLCM (DLC)

Page 526

PN-4DLCT (DLC)

Page 527

PN-4DLCQ (DLC)

Page 528

PN-8DLCL (DLC)

Page 529

PN-8DLCP (DLC)

Page 530

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Page 531

PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

Page 534

PN-32IPLA
(IP-PAD)

Page 537

PN-32IPLA-A
(IP-PAD)

Page 541

PN-4LCC (LC)

Page 545

PN-4LCD-A (LC)

Page 546

PN-4LCE (LC)

Page 547
Continued on next page

*MB = Make Busy

485

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


LINE/TRUNK CARD

List of Line/Trunk Cards

NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)

LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED

REFERENCE
PAGE

PN-4LCF (LC)

Page 548

PN-4LCK (LC)

Page 549

PN-4LCL (LC)

Page 550

PN-4LCV (LC)

Page 551

PN-4LCW (LC)

Page 552

PN-8LCAA (LC)

Page 553

PN-8LCAB (LC)

Page 554

PN-8LCAD (LC)

Page 555

PN-8LCAE (LC)

Page 556

PN-8LCAF (LC)

Page 557

PN-8LCAK (LC)

Page 558

PN-2LDTA (LDT)

Page 559

PN-4LDTA (LDT)

Page 560

PN-4LLCB (LLC)

Page 561

PN-M10 (M10)

Page 563

PN-M13 (M13)

Page 565

PN-2ODTA (ODT)

Page 566

PN-2ODTB (ODT)

Page 567

PN-4ODTA (ODT)

Page 568

PN-4RSTF/
PN-4RSTF-A
(SDT)

Page 570

PN-4RSTH (SDT)

Page 571

PN-8RSTG (PBR)

Page 572
Continued on next page

*MB = Make Busy


486

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


LINE/TRUNK CARD

List of Line/Trunk Cards

NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)

LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

SWITCH
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
: NOT
ALLOWED

REFERENCE
PAGE

PN-RTA (RTA)

PN-TNTA (TNT)

Page 576

PN-4VCTI (4VCT)

Page 578

PN-16VCTA/
PN-16VCTA-A
(16VCT)

Page 580

PZ-8PFTB (PFT)

Page 582

PZ-M623 (ETHER)

Page 583

PZ-M649 (DTI)

Page 584

PZ-M650 (DTI)

Page 587

PZ-VM00/
PZ-VM00-M
(VM00)/
PZ-VM10-M
(VM10)

PZ-VM01 (VM01)

Page 593

PZ-VM02 (VM02)

Page 594

PZ-VM03-M
(VM03)

Page 597

PZ-VM04 (VM04)

Page 602

PZ-VM05 (VM05)

Page 603

PZ-VM06 (VM06)

Page 603

NOTE

Page 573

Page 590

*MB = Make Busy


NOTE:

It is allowed to plugging/unplugging PN-RTA (RTA) card, after flip the PWRSW switch to UP
position (Operating power is off).

487

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-2AMPA (AMP)

PN-2AMPA (AMP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

488

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-CFTA (CFT)

PN-CFTA (CFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when this card is in use.
Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy state
on the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

489

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-CFTB (CFT)

PN-CFTB (CFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL
JP0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when this card is in use.
Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy state
on the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME
JP0

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT

FUNCTION

CHECK

6/10 Party Conference


(When using two PN-CFTB cards)
Not used

490

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2COTD (COT)

PN-2COTD (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0
LF1
LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

BL0, 1

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

LF0, 1

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a meter signal or a


line fault condition.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

491

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2COTE (COT)

PN-2COTE (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0
LF1
LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

BL0, 1

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

LF0, 1

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a meter signal or a


line fault condition.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

492

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

PN-4COTA-A (COT)

PN-4COTA-A (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

493

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4COTB (COT)

PN-4COTB (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

494

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4COTE (COT)

PN-4COTE (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

BL0-3

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

LF0-3

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condition.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

495

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4COTF (COT)

PN-4COTF (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

496

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4COTG (COT)

PN-4COTG (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

497

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-6COTJ (COT)

PN-6COTJ (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF5
LF4
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

BL0-5

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

LF0-5

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condition.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

498

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8COTH (COT)

PN-8COTH (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

499

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8COTQ (COT)

PN-8COTQ (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

500

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8COTR (COT)

PN-8COTR (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

501

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8COTS (COT)

PN-8COTS (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

502

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8COTT (COT)

PN-8COTT (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF7
LF6
LF5
LF4
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

BL0-7

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

LF0-7

Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condition.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

503

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8COTU (COT)

PN-8COTU (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

504

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIA (CSI)

PN-2CSIA (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

OPE
LB
B13
B12
B11
B10
B03
B02
B01
B00
DL1

DL0

505

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIA (CSI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

OPE

Green

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.

LB

Red

Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.

B13

Red

Not used (Flash [60 IPM])

B12

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

B11

B10

Red

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.

B03

Red

Not used (Flash [60 IPM])

B02

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

B01

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

506

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIA (CSI)

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

B00

Red

FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.


: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

DL0
(Rotary SW)

0
0

FUNCTION

CHECK

For normal operation

0-F
1-F

Not used

NOTE
DL1
(Rotary SW)

0
0

For normal operation

0-F
1-F

Not used

NOTE
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of
in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:

Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

507

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

OPE
LB
B13
B12
B11
B10

SP

B03
B02
B01
B00
DL1

DL0

508

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

OPE

Green

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.

LB

Red

Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.

B13

Red

Not used (Flash [60 IPM])

B12

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

B11

B10

Red

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.

B03

Red

Not used (Flash [60 IPM])

B02

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

B01

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

509

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

B00

Red

FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.


: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

DL0
(Rotary SW)

0
0

FUNCTION

CHECK

For normal operation

0-F
1-F

Not used

NOTE
DL1
(Rotary SW)

0
0

For normal operation

0-F
1-F

Not used

UP

For normal operation

NOTE
SP (jumper SW)
1
2
3

Front

DOWN

Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:

Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

510

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIH (CSI)

PN-2CSIH (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

OPE
LB

B12
B11
B10
B02
B01
B00

511

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIH (CSI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

OPE

Green

ON

LB

Red

ON : When a loopback is in progress


OFF : For normal operation

B12

Red

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

B11

B10

B02

B01

Red

Red

Red

Red

: For normal operation

B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

512

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2CSIH (CSI)

LAMP
NAME
B00

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.


: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

513

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4CSIA (CSI)

PN-4CSIA (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
OPE
LB1
LB0
BSY32
BSY31
BSY30
BSY22
BSY21
BSY20
BSY12
BSY11
BSY10
BSY02
BSY01
BSY00

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

OPE

Green

ON

: For normal operation

LB0

Red

No.0 circuit and No.1 circuit status


ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation

LB1

Red

No.2 circuit and No.3 circuit status


ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation
Continued on next page

514

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4CSIA (CSI)

LAMP
NAME
BSY32

BSY31

BSY30

BSY22

BSY21

BSY20

COLOR
Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B2 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
: B2 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

515

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4CSIA (CSI)

LAMP
NAME
BSY12

BSY11

BSY10

BSY02

BSY01

BSY00

COLOR
Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

516

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)

PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
OPE
LB1
LB0
BSY32
BSY31
BSY30
BSY22
BSY21
BSY20
BSY12
BSY11
BSY10
BSY02
BSY01
BSY00

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

OPE

Green

ON

: For normal operation

LB0

Red

No.0 circuit and No.1 circuit status


ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation

LB1

Red

No.2 circuit and No.3 circuit status


ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation
Continued on next page

517

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)

LAMP
NAME
BSY32

BSY31

BSY30

BSY22

BSY21

BSY20

COLOR
Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B2 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
: B2 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

518

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)

LAMP
NAME
BSY12

BSY11

BSY10

BSY02

BSY01

BSY00

COLOR
Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)

: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.


: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
: ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

519

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4DATC (DAT)

PN-4DATC (DAT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

520

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4DIDA (DIT)

PN-4DIDA (DIT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

521

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

PN-2DITA (DIT)

PN-2DITA (DIT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

522

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4DITB (DIT)

PN-4DITB (DIT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

523

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-DK00 (DK)

PN-DK00 (DK)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

524

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2DLCN (DLC)

PN-2DLCN (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

CN0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

525

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4DLCM (DLC)

PN-4DLCM (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

526

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4DLCT (DLC)

PN-4DLCT (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

527

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

PN-4DLCQ (DLC)

PN-4DLCQ (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

528

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8DLCL (DLC)

PN-8DLCL (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

529

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8DLCP (DLC)

PN-8DLCP (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

530

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

ACT1
PAL1
LPB1
B21
B11
ACT0
PAL0
LPB0
B20
B10

SW1

SW0

531

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

ACT1

Green

No.1
Circuit

PAL1

Red

ON: Line is short-circuiting.


OFF: Normally operating.

LPB1

Red

OFF: Not used.

B21

Red

ON: B2 channel is in use.


OFF: B2 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B2 channel is in make busy state.

B11

Red

ON: B1 channel is in use.


OFF: B1 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B1 channel is in make busy state.

ACT0

Green

PAL0

Red

ON: Line is short-circuiting.


OFF: Normally operating.

LPB0

Red

OFF: Not used

B20

Red

ON: B2 channel is in use.


OFF: B2 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B2 channel is in make busy state.

B10

Red

ON: B1 channel is in use.


OFF: B1 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B1 channel is in make busy state.

No. 0
Circuit

ON: Normally operating.


OFF: Not operating.

ON: Normally operating.


OFF: Not operating.

532

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON

SW0
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

OFF

Always set to OFF

ON
1
OFF

OFF
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

ON
2
OFF

ON

ON
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF

CHECK

No.0
Circuit
(Receiving)

Terminating register is
provided.

No.0
Circuit
(Sending)

Terminating register is
provided.

No.1
Circuit
(Receiving)

Terminating register is
provided.

No.1
Circuit
(Sending)

Terminating register is
provided.

Terminating register is
not provided.

Terminating register is
not provided.

Terminating register is
not provided.

Terminating register is
not provided.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure
and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

533

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

DC_CONN

SENS
PZ-24IPLA
NOTE

RUN
MB

SW0
BUSY
DC
L1
L0
LINK
100M
ACT

LAN
RS

NOTE:

Order the PZ-24IPLA card separately.

534

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flash (240 IPM): Initializing this card.


Flash (120 IPM): Normal operation.
OFF:
Idle/Make Busy.

BUSY

Red

ON:
All channels are busy.
Flash (120 IPM): One or more channels are busy (except for a case
where all channels are busy).
OFF:
All channels are idle.

DC

Green

ON:
OFF:

PZ-24IPLA card already mounted is operating.


PZ-24IPLA card is not mounted.

L0

Red

ON:

Disconnection of a link with the IP network has been


detected.

L1

Green

ON:
OFF:

G723.1 is enabled.
G723.1 is disabled.

LINK

Green

ON:
OFF:

Connected to the IP network.


Not connected to the IP network.

100M

Green

ON:
OFF:

Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.


Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

ACT

Green

ON:
OFF:

Data is sending/receiving to the IP network.


Data is not sending/receiving to the IP network.

535

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 1
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

Auto Negotiation OFF


(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed)

OFF

Auto Negotiation ON
(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)

OFF

Not used

3
NOTE 2

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 2: When using the firmware program of SC-3330 IPS IPADT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPLA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firmware program of SC-3213 IPS IPADT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPLA card, Auto Negotiation
function is always set to ON.

536

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
PN-32IPLA
PZ-M571
SUBA

PZ-M572 PN-32IPLA

RUN

VC3
VC2
VC1
VC0

SUBB

MB

RUN
MB

SW0

SW0

BL
LOAD
PCON
AUX

VCTB

VCTB

VCTA

VCTA

VCTB/VCTA:
To 16VCT Card VCT1A/
VCT0A Connector
LAN:
To LAN

LAN

MODE

PZ-M571

NALM
LINK
IPDL
100M
TX
RX
COL

LAN

MODE

537

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

Lamp Indications
PN-32IPLA

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flash (120 IPM) : This card is operating normally.


OFF
: This card is not operating.

BL

Red

ON : At least one line is busy.


OFF : All lines are idle.

LOAD

Not used

PCON

Not used

AUX

Not used

VC3

Remains lit when the last 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without


Card No.1 of 16VCT.

VC2

Green

Remains lit when Card No. 1 of 16VCT is operating.

VC1

Green

Remains lit when the first 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without


Card No.0 of 16VCT.

VC0

Green

Remains lit when Card No. 0 of 16VCT is operating.

PZ-M571

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

NALM

Not used

LINK

Green

ON : Connected to the IP network.


OFF : Not connected to the IP network.

IPDL

Not used

100M

Green

ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.


OFF : Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

TX

Green

ON : Sending IP data
OFF : Not sending IP data

RX

Green

ON : Receiving IP data
OFF : Not receiving IP data

COL

Yellow

ON

: Detecting IP data collision

538

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

Switch Settings
PN-32IPLA

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP
DOWN

NOTE
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy
For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

NOTE:

When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

539

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

PZ-M571

SWITCH NAME
MODE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
0-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Auto Negotiation ON
(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)

Auto Negotiation OFF


(10 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)

Auto Negotiation OFF


(100 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)

1, 2, 5-F

Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

540

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
PN-32IPLA-A
PZ-M632

PZ-M633 PN-32IPLA-A

SUBA
RUN
MB

RUN
MB

SW0

SW0
VC3
VC2
VC1
VC0

BL
LOAD
PCON
AUX

VCTB
VCTA

SUBB

VCTB/VCTA:
To 16VCT Card VCT1A/
VCT0A Connector

VCTB
MODE

VCTA

LAN

LAN:
To LAN

PZ-M632

NALM
LINK
IPDL
100M
TX
RX
COL

MODE

LAN

541

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

Lamp Indications
PN-32IPLA-A

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

RUN

Green

Flash (120 IPM) : This card is operating normally.


OFF
: This card is not operating.

BL

Red

ON : At least one line is busy.


OFF : All lines are idle.

LOAD

Not used

PCON

Not used

AUX

Not used

VC3

Remains lit when the last 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without


Card No.1 of 16VCT.

VC2

Green

Remains lit when Card No.1 of 16VCT is operating.

VC1

Remains lit when the first 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without


Card No.0 of 16VCT.

VC0

Green

Remains lit when Card No. 0 of 16VCT is operating.

PZ-M632

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

NALM

Not used

LINK

Green

ON : Connected to the IP network.


OFF : Not connected to the IP network.

IPDL

Not used

100M

Green

ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.


OFF : Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

TX

Green

ON : Sending IP data
OFF : Not sending IP data

RX

Green

ON : Receiving IP data
OFF : Not receiving IP data

COL

Yellow

ON

: Detecting IP data collision

542

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

Switch Settings
PN-32IPLA-A

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP
DOWN

NOTE
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON

NOTE:

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy
For normal operation

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

543

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

PZ-M632

SWITCH NAME
MODE
(Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
0-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Auto Negotiation ON
(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)

Auto Negotiation OFF


(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed) NOTE

Auto Negotiation OFF


(10 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)

Auto Negotiation OFF


(100 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)

2, 5-F

Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:

When using the firmware program of SC-3150 IPS IPPAD PROG-C1 or later for the PN32IPLA-A card, you may set the MODE switch to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF [100 Mbps <FullDuplex> fixed]). When using the firmware program of SC-3090 IPS IPPAD PROG-B1 for the
PN-32IPLA-A card, you may not set the MODE switch to 1.

544

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006

PN-4LCC (LC)

PN-4LCC (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

545

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LCD-A (LC)

PN-4LCD-A (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

546

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LCE (LC)

PN-4LCE (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

547

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LCF (LC)

PN-4LCF (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

548

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LCK (LC)

PN-4LCK (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

549

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LCL (LC)

PN-4LCL (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

550

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LCV (LC)

PN-4LCV (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

551

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LCW (LC)

PN-4LCW (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

552

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8LCAA (LC)

PN-8LCAA (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

553

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8LCAB (LC)

PN-8LCAB (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

554

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8LCAD (LC)

PN-8LCAD (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

555

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8LCAE (LC)

PN-8LCAE (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

556

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8LCAF (LC)

PN-8LCAF (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

557

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-8LCAK (LC)

PN-8LCAK (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

558

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

PN-2LDTA (LDT)

PN-2LDTA (LDT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

559

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LDTA (LDT)

PN-4LDTA (LDT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

560

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LLCB (LLC)

PN-4LLCB (LLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
MORVS

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

561

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4LLCB (LLC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH
NAME
MORVS
(Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
UP
DOWN

FUNCTION

CHECK

Momentary Open
Reverse

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

562

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-M10 (M10)

PN-M10 (M10)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

JP3

JP4

CN1

JP1

JP0

CK0
CK1
TALM
RALM

To Optical Fiber

JP2

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

CK0

Green

Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 0 circuit


on this card.

CK1

Green

Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 1 circuit


on this card.

TALM

Red

Remains lit when optical output is stopped.

RALM

Red

Remains lit when optical input is lost or stopped.

563

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-M10 (M10)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
JP0, 1
(Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
UP

When connected to E1 (2 M) Digital


Trunk Interface
When connected to T1 (1.5 M) Digital
Trunk Interface

RIGHT

Line code: B8ZS* is provided


(For T1 interface)
*B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution

LEFT

Line code: B8ZS* is not provide


(For T1 interface)
*B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution

RIGHT
LEFT

JP4 (Jumper pin)

CHECK

DOWN
JP2 (Jumper pin)

JP3 (Jumper pin)

FUNCTION

UP
DOWN

When connected to E1 (2 M) Digital


Trunk Interface
When connected to T1 (1.5 M) Digital
Trunk Interface
When connected to E1 (2 M) Digital
Trunk Interface
When connected to T1 (1.5 M) Digital
Trunk Interface

564

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-M13 (M13)

PN-M13 (M13)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

LC

TEL

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

565

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2ODTA (ODT)

PN-2ODTA (ODT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

566

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-2ODTB (ODT)

PN-2ODTB (ODT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

567

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4ODTA (ODT)

PN-4ODTA (ODT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

JP3
JP2
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

JP1
JP0
CN3

To E&M
Connector Pin
CN2

CN1

To 2,3 Circuit
Tx/Rx

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

568

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4ODTA (ODT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

JP0-3 (Jumper Pin)


GND

UP

Always set to UP

OPEN

569

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT)

PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

570

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005

PN-4RSTH (SDT)

PN-4RSTH (SDT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

571

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-8RSTG (PBR)

PN-8RSTG (PBR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

572

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-RTA (RTA)

PN-RTA (RTA)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

PWR
ALM
BUSY

SWM

PWRSW
L1LNK
L1ACT
L1SPD
L2LNK
L2ACT

LAN2: To 10BASE-T
SUBCONN
LAN1: To 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Console: To Local Console

573

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-RTA (RTA)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

PWR

Green

ON : Operating power is ON.


OFF: Operating power is OFF.

ALM

Red

Remains lit when a trouble occurs.

BUSY
Green
NOTE 1

Remain lit while writing/reading the data to/from the flash memory.

L1LNK

Green

Remains lit while LAN1 port is connected to the network.

L1ACT

Green

Flashes while LAN1 port is sending or receiving the data.

L1SPD

Green

Remains lit while LAN1 port is operating at 100 Mbps.

L2LNK

Green

Remains lit while LAN2 port is connected to the network.

L2ACT

Green

Flashes while LAN2 port is sending or receiving the data.

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME
PWRSW
(Toggle SW)

NOTE 2

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

UP

Operating power is OFF

DOWN

Operating power is ON

CHECK

Continued on next page

574

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-RTA (RTA)

SWITCH NAME
SWM
(Piano Key SW)

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON

Test Mode

OFF

For normal operation

ON

For aging

OFF

For normal operation

OFF

Not used

ON

Super Reset

OFF

For normal operation

CHECK

OFF
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

2
ON

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Do not turn off the system power and operating power of PN-RTA card while the BUSY lamp is
lit.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the PWRSW switch to UP position (Operating power is off) before
plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

575

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-TNTA (TNT)

PN-TNTA (TNT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW

JACK1

JACK0

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

576

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-TNTA (TNT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW
(Piano Key SW)

CHECK

Volume adjustment for No.0 circuit

SWITCH NUMBER

OFF
4
3
2
1

FUNCTION

1, 2

ON

VOLUME

OFF

OFF

10 dB

ON

OFF

7 dB

OFF

ON

4 dB

ON

ON

1 dB

Volume adjustment for No.1 circuit

SWITCH NUMBER
3, 4

VOLUME

OFF

OFF

10 dB

ON

OFF

7 dB

OFF

ON

4 dB

ON

ON

1 dB

577

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4VCTI (4VCT)

PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
SW1

IPTA
IPT

IPTA/IPT:
To IPT Card VCTA/VCT Connector
or
To Other 4VCT Card EXPA/EXP
Connector

EXPA
EXP

EXPA/EXP:
To IPTA/IPT Connector of
Other 4VCT Card

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

578

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-4VCTI (4VCT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1
(Piano Key SW)

FUNCTION

Set the number per 4VCT card if two or more 4VCT


cards are used. (Maximum four 4VCT cards)

SW No.

OFF
4
3
2
1

CHECK

1, 2

ON

3
4

Card No.

1-1

1-2

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Not used
Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

579

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)

PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL0
SW1

VCT1B
VCT0B
VCT1A
VCT0A

VCT1B/VCT0B:
To VCT1A/VCT0A Connector on
Another 16VCT Card
VCT1A/VCT0A:
To IP-PAD Card VCTB/VCTA Connector
or
To VCT1B/VCT0B Connector on
Another 16VCT Card

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
BL0

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when 0-15 channels are busy.

580

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1
(Piano Key SW)

FUNCTION

Set the number per 16VCT card if two 16VCT cards


are used. (Maximum two 16VCT cards)

SW No.

OFF

1, 2

4
3
2
1

CHECK

ON

3
4

Card No.

1-1

1-2

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Not used
Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

581

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-8PFTB (PFT)

PZ-8PFTB (PFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

PFT1

PFT0

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

582

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-M623 (ETHER)

PZ-M623 (ETHER)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
FACE

REAR
W1LNK
W1ACT
LAN

CONN

CONN : To SUBCONN Connector on PN-RTA

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

W1LNK

Green

Remains lit while LAN port is connected to the network.

W1ACT

Green

Flashes while LAN port is sending or receiving the data.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

583

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-M649 (DTI)

PZ-M649 (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
FACE

REAR
PBXRED W1LNK
PBXYEL W1ACT
PBXBLU
SW

WAN

CONN

CONN : To SUBCONN Connector on PN-RTA

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

W1LNK

Green

Remains lit while WAN port is connected to the network.

W1ACT

Green

Flashes while WAN port is sending or receiving the data.

PBXRED

Red

Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (PCM loss/
Multi Frame loss/Frame loss).

PBXYEL

Red

Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (PMT


Alarm).

PBXBLU

Red

Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (AIS


Alarm).

584

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-M649 (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
ON
1
2
3
4

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

1
NOTE 1
NOTE 2

2
NOTE 1
NOTE 2

3
4

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
(1.5 MHz clock).

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
(1.5 MHz clock).

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card
(1.5 MHz clock).

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card
(1.5 MHz clock).

OFF

Not used

ON

WAN port or T1 interface for PBX are


available.

OFF

Only WAN port is available.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

585

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-M649 (DTI)

NOTE 1: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

DTI0

DTI1

DTI2

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
When one DTI is
provided.

When more than


one DTI is provided.

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

DTI7
SW

SW

-1

-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive
the clock signal from
DTI0 at its PLO0
input.

MP card will receive


the clock signal from
DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal
conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure
occurs with DTI0, MP
card will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which
gets clock from DTI1.

NOTE 2: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in
PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 3: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

586

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-M650 (DTI)

PZ-M650 (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
FACE

REAR
W1LNK
W1ACT
SW

WAN

CONN

CONN : To SUBCONN Connector on PN-RTA

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

W1LNK

Green

Remains lit while WAN port is connected to the network.

W1ACT

Green

Flashes while WAN port is sending or receiving the data.

587

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-M650 (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
ON
1
2
3
4

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
(2.048 MHz clock).

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
(2.048 MHz clock).

ON

Source clock signal from network is


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card
(2.048 MHz clock).

OFF

Source clock signal from network is not


sent to the PLO1 input on MP card
(2.048 MHz clock).

OFF

Not used

ON

Fixed

1
NOTE 1
NOTE 2

2
NOTE 1
NOTE 2

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

588

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-M650 (DTI)

NOTE 1: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

DTI0

DTI1

DTI2

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
When one DTI is
provided.

When more than


one DTI is provided.

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

DTI7
SW

SW

-1

-2

REMARKS
MP card will receive
the clock signal from
DTI0 at its PLO0
input.

MP card will receive


the clock signal from
DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal
conditions.
OFF OFF Should a clock failure
occurs with DTI0, MP
card will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which
gets clock from DTI1.

NOTE 2: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in
PIM0 to OFF.
NOTE 3: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

589

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)


Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
CPU Board (Top Side)
CPU Board (top side)

RXD
TXD
MOD
RI

COM2

VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M Card

SW1-4
SW1-1
COM1

HDD
BIOS
Internal modem

NOTE: Only the PZVM00 is not


equipped with internal modem.

DSP Board (Bottom Side)


VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M Card

DSP Board (bottom side)


BL7
BL0
SWP
MB
DSP
PL3
PL0
RST

CN3
(VM01 Card Slot)

590

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
CPU
Board

FUNCTION

RXD

Green

Not used

TXD

Red

Not used

MOD

Green

Not used

RI

Red

Incoming call

HDD

Red

Accessing to the HDD

Built-in hard disk is faulty

Red

BIOS programming is in operation

DOS mode has been activated

BIOS
DSP
Board

COLOR

BL0-7 Red

Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

SWP

Red

20 seconds after the MB switch is turned ON (upward) (The circuit


card can be plugged/unplugged while this pilot lamp is on.)

DSP

Green/
Flashing

According to voice mail application program in use.

Red/
Flashing
PL0-3

Red

DSP circuit operating

591

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

MB (Toggle SW)

UP

FUNCTION

CHECK

For make-busy

ON

DOWN

NOTE 1
RST (Toggle SW)

For normal operation

Push when starting up this card, after MB switch is set


to DOWN position.

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)

OFF
4
3
2
1

ON

BIOS Redirect Utility (Key board)


NOTE 3

OFF

Normal Operation

ON

BIOS Redirect Utility (Floppy Drive)


NOTE 3

OFF

Normal Operation

ON

COM2: Use internal modem for remote


maintenance

OFF

COM2: RS-232C (For local direct connection to maintenance console)

OFF

Not used

ON

NOTE 2

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 2: When SW1 settings have changed, RST switch must be pushed.
NOTE 3: Use BIOS Redirect only when assisted by NEC.

592

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006

PZ-VM01 (VM01)

PZ-VM01 (VM01)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

VM01 Card (on VM00/VM10 DSP Board)

PL7
PL4

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME
PL4-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
DSP circuit operating

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

593

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006

PZ-VM02 (VM02)

PZ-VM02 (VM02)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CPU Board
(top side)

SW1
CN3
(HDD)

HDD

Internal
modem

SW2
ALM
SWAP
HDD
APL
BIOS
CN7 (COM1)
CN8 (COM2)

CN14 (MONI)

CN9 (PARA)
LINK
100M
CN10 (To LAN)

FAN
CN11 (USB)
CN12 (PS/2)
SW4
CN15 (FAN)

NOTE:

SW3

HDD is a local content product.

594

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM02 (VM02)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

ALM

Red

Flashes when this card is operating normally.

HDD

Green

Flashes when loading BIOS bootstrap programs (When this card is


starting up), and when accessing the internal HDD.

BIOS

Green

Lights when BIOS program starts and goes out when OS program
starts.

SWAP

Red

Lights when OS is shut down.

APL

Green/Red

According to application software.

LINK

Green

Lights when LAN link pulse is detected.


Flashes when LAN data is transferred and received.

100M

Green

Indicates LAN is connected in 100 Mbps.

595

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM02 (VM02)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1
(Rotary SW)
0-F

Reset of the VM02 card

Power Button of the VM02 card

2-F
SW2
(Push SW)

SW3
(Piano Key SW)

FUNCTION

CHECK

Not used
When rebooting the VM02 card, push
SW2 switch after setting SW1 switch to
0.
When making power of the VM02 card
ON/OFF, push SW2 switch after setting
SW1 switch to 1.

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

Not used

OFF

COM2 is used for RS-232C port

OFF

Not used

OFF
2
1
ON

SW4
(Piano Key SW)

OFF
2
1

2
ON

596

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

PZ-VM03-M (VM03)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
CPU Board (Top Side)

CPU Board
(top side)

SW1
CN3
(HDD)

HDD

Internal
modem

SW2
ALM
SWAP
HDD
APL
BIOS
CN7 (COM1)
CN8 (COM2)

CN14 (MONI)

CN9 (PARA)
LINK
100M
CN10 (To LAN)

FAN
CN11 (USB)
CN12 (PS/2)
SW4
CN15 (FAN)

SW3
CN6 (DSP Board)

NOTE:

HDD is a local content product.

597

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

DSP Board (Bottom Side)

DSP Board
(bottom side)

BL7 (15)

BL0 (8)

SWP
SW5
APP
DSP
CN18
LD7 (15)

LD0 (8)

CN17

SW6

CN17 (CPU Board)

CN18 : To CN20 connector on PZ-VM05/PZ-VM06 card

598

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

Lamp Indications
CPU Board

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

ALM

Red

Flashes when this card is operating normally.

HDD

Green

Flashes when loading BIOS bootstrap programs (When this card is


starting up), and when accessing the internal HDD.

BIOS

Green

Lights when BIOS program starts and goes out when OS program
starts.

SWAP

Red

Lights when OS is shut down.

APL

Green/Red

According to voice mail application software.

LINK

Green

Lights when LAN link pulse is detected.


Flashes when LAN data is transferred and received.

100M

Green

Indicates LAN is connected in 100 Mbps.

DSP Board

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

BL0-BL7

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Blink when corresponding circuit is in make busy state or the system
data for the circuit is not assigned.

SWAP

Green/Red

Lights when OS is shut down. VMS system including PC section can


be unplugged while this LED lights.

APP

Green/Red

Lights or flashes according to the VMS application program.

DSP

Red

Lights when OS is downloaded.

LD0-LD7

Red

Lights when the corresponding DSP port is used.

599

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

Switch Settings
CPU Board

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW1
(Rotary SW)

FUNCTION

Reset of the VM03 card

Power ON of the VM03 card

For normal operation

CHECK

0-F

2-E
SW2
(Push SW)

SW3
(Piano Key SW)

Not used
Push when starting up the VM03 card,
after the SW1 switch is set to 1 and the
SW5 switch is set to DOWN (MB off)
position.

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON

COM2 is used for internal modem


(remote maintenance)

OFF

COM2 is used for RS-232C port (local


direct connection to maintenance console)

OFF

Not used

OFF
2
1
ON

SW4
(Piano Key SW)
OFF

2
1
ON

600

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

DSP Board

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION

SW5 (Toggle SW)

UP
DOWN

NOTE
SW6
(Dip SW)

CHECK

For shut-down (MB on)


For normal operation (MB off)
SW
6-1
OFF

SW
6-2
OFF Voice Mail started in
direct mode (When
SW4-1 is set to OFF.)
ON Voice Mail started in
modem mode (When
SW4-1 is set to ON.)

OFF

OFF

OFF

Not used

OFF

Not used

ON
1 2 3 4

FUNCTION

OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of


in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

601

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM04 (VM04)

PZ-VM04 (VM04)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

DSP Board
(put between VM03)

BL7 (15)

BL0 (8)

CN18
LD7 (15)

LD0 (8)

CN17

CN17 (CPU Board)

CN19
(DSP Board)

CN18 : To CN18 connector on PZ-VM05/PZ-VM06 card

Lamp Indications

LAMP
NAME

COLOR

FUNCTION

BL0-BL7

Red

Lights when the corresponding circuit is in use.


Blink when corresponding circuit is in make busy state or the system
data for the circuit is not assigned.

LD0-LD7

Red

Lights when the corresponding DSP port is used.

Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

602

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm

PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06)

PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06)


Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CN20

CN20: To CN18 connector on DSP Board

Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.

603

NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch3004.fm